Motorola i875 User Manual
i875 BoostMobile® Phone User’s Guide  
FINAL  
TM  
Recent Calls..............................................50  
Calls and Call Alerts........................................50  
My Info From Other Phones............................50  
Contact Information From Other Phones ........51  
Viewing the Recent Calls List..........................51  
Storing Items to Contacts................................52  
Deleting Items .................................................52  
Making Calls From the Recent Calls List ........53  
Easy Media Creator ............................. 33  
Installation .......................................................33  
Installing Easy Media CreatorTM  
7
..................34  
Starting Easy Media CreatorTM 7 ....................35  
Making MP3 Files............................................35  
Where to Find More Information......................37  
Audio Player............................................. 39  
Playing Audio Files with the Flip Closed .........39  
Playing Audio Files with the Flip Open............40  
How Your Audio Files Are Organized..............41  
Searching By First Letter.................................42  
Playing a List, Repeat, and Shuffle .................42  
Working with Playlists......................................43  
Deleting Audio Files ........................................46  
DRM Items ......................................................47  
Setting Audio and Visual Options....................47  
Entering Text ............................................55  
Using Word Mode ...........................................55  
Special Function Keys.....................................56  
Contacts ....................................................58  
Accessing Contacts.........................................59  
Creating Entries ..............................................59  
Editing Entries .................................................61  
Viewing Entries ...............................................61  
Deleting Entries...............................................63  
Checking Capacity ..........................................64  
Creating Pauses and Waits.............................64  
International Numbers.....................................64  
Making Calls From Contacts ...........................65  
Call Alerts................................................. 48  
Sending Call Alerts..........................................48  
Receiving Call Alerts .......................................48  
Using the Call Alert Queue..............................48  
ii  
BoostTM Text and Numeric Messages............79  
Web Alerts.......................................................81  
Memo ........................................................ 67  
Call Forwarding........................................ 68  
Forwarding All Calls ........................................68  
Turning Off Call Forwarding ............................68  
Forwarding Missed Calls.................................68  
Viewing Call Forwarding Settings....................69  
Ringtones..................................................82  
Setting Your Phone to Vibrate.........................82  
Assigning Ringtones to Contacts ....................83  
Ring and Vibrate .............................................83  
Viewing Ringtone Assignments.......................83  
Downloading More Ringtones .........................84  
About DRM Ringtones ....................................84  
Managing Memory ..........................................84  
Deleting Custom Ringtones ............................84  
Advanced Calling Features..................... 70  
Putting a Call on Hold......................................70  
Creating Pauses and Waits While Dialing.......70  
Making International Calls...............................70  
One Touch BoostTM Walkie-Talkie (WT).........71  
Setting Flip Actions..........................................71  
Call Timers ......................................................72  
Using Your Phone as a Modem ......................73  
Making TTY Calls............................................74  
Special Dialing Codes .....................................75  
Additional Calling Features .............................76  
Multi-Media Messages .............................86  
Navigating the Inbox, Drafts, and Sent Items..86  
Creating and Sending Messages ....................86  
Drafts...............................................................96  
Sent Items .......................................................97  
Receiving a Message......................................98  
Navigating a Message.....................................99  
Messages ................................................. 78  
Message Notifications .....................................78  
Voice Mail........................................................79  
Viewing Received Messages  
From the Message Center........................100  
Actions for Received Messages....................100  
iii  
Customizing MMS .........................................104  
Managing Memory.........................................106  
Customizing the Camera...............................124  
Managing Memory ........................................124  
®
Boost Mobile Voice Mail ..................... 108  
Media Center...........................................126  
Viewing the Media Center.............................126  
Forward Locked Items...................................128  
DRM Items ....................................................129  
Pictures .........................................................129  
Videos ...........................................................131  
Audio Recordings..........................................131  
Renaming Items ............................................132  
Locking Items................................................132  
Deleting Items ...............................................133  
Copying and Moving Items............................133  
Changing Storage Preference.......................134  
Accessing the Audio Player ..........................134  
Accessing the Camera ..................................134  
Managing Memory ........................................134  
Setting Up Your Voice Mail Box ....................108  
Playing Messages .........................................108  
Changing Your Password..............................109  
Recording Your Name...................................109  
Recording Your Active Greeting....................109  
Advanced Voice Mail Features......................110  
SMS......................................................... 114  
SMS Messages .............................................114  
BoostTM Wireless Web Services ........... 116  
Starting the Microbrowser .............................116  
Camera ................................................... 118  
Accessing the Camera ..................................118  
Taking Pictures..............................................118  
More Actions for Captured Pictures ..............120  
Recording Videos..........................................122  
Changing Storage Preference.......................123  
Accessing the Media Center .........................124  
My Info.....................................................136  
Viewing My Info.............................................136  
Editing My Info ..............................................136  
Setting Sending Options ...............................137  
iv  
Using Walkie-Talkie Send ..................... 138  
Sending a Picture..........................................138  
Receiving a Picture .......................................139  
Sending My Info and Contact Information.....140  
Java® Applications .................................154  
Running Applications ....................................154  
Suspending Applications...............................154  
Resuming Applications..................................154  
Ending Applications.......................................155  
Downloading Applications.............................155  
Deleting Applications.....................................155  
Managing Memory ........................................156  
Shortcuts on the Main Menu .........................156  
Java Applications and GPS Enabled ............157  
Bluetooth® ............................................. 143  
Understanding Bluetooth® Access Settings..143  
Setting Your Phone for Bluetooth®................144  
Accessing Bluetooth® ...................................145  
Making a Bluetooth® Connection ..................145  
Setting Device Details ...................................148  
Sending Contacts, Datebook Events and  
Digital Rights Management ...................160  
Installing Applications....................................160  
Understanding DRM Status Icons.................160  
Sharing Items................................................161  
Managing DRM Items ...................................161  
Pictures.....................................................149  
Receiving Items.............................................150  
Voice Records........................................ 151  
Viewing Voice Records .................................151  
Creating Voice Records ................................151  
Playing Voice Records ..................................152  
Labeling Voice Records ................................152  
Locking Voice Records..................................152  
Deleting Voice Records.................................153  
Managing Memory.........................................153  
GPS (Global Positioning System)  
Enabled................................................164  
IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind ..........164  
Making an Emergency Call ...........................166  
Viewing Your Approximate Location .............167  
Enhancing GPS Performance .......................168  
v
Updating Satellite Almanac Data...................169  
Setting Privacy Options.................................170  
Using GPS with Map Software......................171  
How Changing Settings Affects Profiles........186  
Temporary Profiles........................................187  
Creating Profiles............................................188  
Editing Profiles ..............................................188  
Deleting Profiles ............................................188  
Setting Call Filtering ......................................189  
Datebook ................................................ 173  
Viewing Datebook .........................................173  
Creating Events.............................................174  
Editing Events ...............................................176  
Deleting Events .............................................176  
Receiving Reminders ....................................177  
Shortcuts.................................................190  
Creating a Shortcut .......................................190  
Using a Shortcut............................................190  
Editing a Shortcut..........................................191  
Deleting Shortcuts.........................................191  
Making Calls From Datebook and  
Datebook Reminders................................177  
Customizing Datebook Setup........................178  
Using a Headset .....................................192  
Using a Bluetooth® Headset .........................192  
Attaching a Headset......................................192  
Customizing Your Phone...................... 179  
Setting the Volume........................................179  
Setting Your Phone to Vibrate.......................179  
Changing the Look of Your Phone ................179  
Temporarily Turning Off Transmissions ........181  
Using Settings ...............................................181  
Using a Remote BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
Button .......................................................192  
Profiles ................................................... 186  
Viewing Profiles.............................................186  
Switching Profiles..........................................186  
vi  
BoostTM Customer Care ........................ 194  
Understanding Status Messages ......... 195  
MOTOROLA LIMITED WARRANTY .......219  
Patent and Trademark Information.......223  
Index ........................................................224  
Boost MobileTM Terms and  
Conditions of Service ........................ 198  
Safety and General Information ........... 208  
RF Operational Characteristics .....................208  
Portable Radio Product Operation and  
EME Exposure..........................................208  
Electro Magnetic Interference/Compatibility..211  
Medical Devices ............................................211  
Operational Warnings....................................212  
Operational Cautions.....................................213  
Accessory Safety Information........................214  
Hearing Aid Compatibility..................... 216  
Caring for the Environment by  
Recycling ............................................ 218  
Disposal of your Mobile Telephone and  
Accessories ..............................................218  
vii  
Note: This equipment has been tested and  
found to comply with the limits for a Class  
B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates,  
uses and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may  
cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur  
in a particular installation.  
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY  
Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a)  
Responsible Party Name: Motorola, Inc.  
Address: 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard  
Plantation, FL 33322 USA  
Phone Number: 1 (800) 453-0920  
If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is  
Hereby declares that the product:  
Product Name: i875  
encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
Model Number: H85XAH6RR5AN  
Conforms to the following regulations:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving  
antenna.  
FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a),  
15.107(d) and section 15.109(a)  
• Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
Class B Digital Device  
As a personal computer peripheral, this device  
complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation  
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on  
a circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/TV technician for help.  
viii  
Games and applications require a Java® enabled  
handset. Visit boost LIVE  
(www.boostmobile.com/boostlive) for the latest list of  
entertainment applications currently available and  
purchase these options online.  
Introduction  
Welcome to Boost Mobile®  
So what's really good? You know the answer. It's life  
with no hassles and no limits. It's the freedom to  
make your own choices at your own pace. It's having  
all the options you need to stay ahead of the game.  
And that's what makes Boost Mobile®  
Pay-As-You-Go such a tight fit for how you roll. With  
Boost Mobile® you pay up front, stay in control of your  
monthly costs and get all the mobile freedom you  
demand. Boost Mobile® has the latest Motorola  
handsets with the coolest features, like BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie, BoostTM Wireless Web, and Text  
Messaging. Plus, you get instant access to Nextel's  
world-class digital iDEN network.  
BoostTM Your Way  
Trick out your Phone  
Got some down time? Then get down with the coolest  
games, entertainment, ringtones, musictones,  
celebrity voice mails, and wallpapers available for  
purchase right from your phone. No credit card  
needed - get it deducted from your current stash of  
minutes.  
     
Getting Started  
Earpiece  
Retractable  
Antenna  
Multi-Function Button  
Speaker (on/off)  
Internal  
Display  
Option Keys  
Camera Lens  
Mirror  
Navigation Key  
down - recent call list  
menu  
Spotlight  
right - ringtones  
menu  
Volume  
Controls  
Light Sensor  
Camera Key  
up - Re-BoostTM  
left - Java® Apps  
menu  
Audio  
Player Keys  
Menu Key  
BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie  
Button  
Ok Key  
External  
Display  
Send Key  
(places phone calls)  
Rear  
Speaker  
Memory  
Card Slot  
Audio Jack  
Space Key  
Back Key  
Microphone  
Power Key  
Accessory  
Connector  
1
   
s
e
Send key — places phone calls.  
End key — ends phone calls; returns to  
idle screen; using Wireless Data  
Services, returns to home page.  
p
Power button.  
Navigation key — press the arrows to  
scroll through menus and lists.  
O
m
OK key — selects highlighted item;  
answers calls.  
t
.
Acts like s when the flip is closed; turns  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie speaker on and off;  
used with voice names and voice records.  
Menu key — accesses context-sensitive  
menus.  
Acts like e when the flip is closed;  
accesses recent calls; sends incoming  
calls to voice mail.  
c
Camera key — Accesses camera and  
takes pictures.  
A
Option key — selects the option  
appearing above it on the display.  
Note: Throughout this User’s Guide,  
the option keys will be  
represented by A.  
2
       
Getting Started  
Battery  
Removing the Battery Door  
1 Make sure the phone is powered off. See  
“Powering On and Off” on page 6.  
2 Slide the release button back until it releases the  
battery door.  
y
z
x
Accesses the audio player when the flip is  
closed; plays audio files; pauses audio  
files.  
When an audio file is playing,  
fast-forwards and skips to the next audio  
file.  
When an audio file is playing, rewinds and  
skips to the previous audio file.  
release  
button  
To start using your i875 phone:  
•
•
•
•
Make sure your SIM card is in place.  
Charge the battery.  
Activate your service.  
Enable security.  
3 Allow the battery door to pop up, slide it forward,  
and remove it from the back of your phone.  
3
       
Removing the Battery Door  
2 Open the connector cover.  
Inserting the Battery  
Your phone comes with a Standard Lithium Ion  
Battery.  
1 Remove the battery door.  
2 Insert the battery into the battery area. Press the  
battery down to secure it.  
connector  
cover  
3 Plug the other end of the charger into the  
accessory connector.  
3 Replace the battery door and press it gently until  
you hear a click.  
Charging the Battery  
Your phone comes with a rapid travel charger.  
Charger Attached or Device Attached appears  
on the internal display.  
1 Plug the charger into an electrical outlet.  
4
     
Getting Started  
Tip: To remove the charger from the accessory  
connector: Press the buttons on the sides  
of the plug. Pull the plug straight out.  
Removing the Battery  
1 With the phone powered off, remove the battery  
door.  
2 Remove the battery by pushing it toward the  
antenna and lifting it out.  
4 If you have purchased optional batteries or  
chargers, see “Charging Times”.  
Charging Times  
Check your battery and charger type against the  
grid below to determine appropriate charging  
times.  
Battery  
Charger  
Rapid  
Battery Use and Maintenance  
Standard  
4 hours  
•
The Motorola iDEN Approved Lithium Ion  
chargers provide optimum performance. Other  
chargers may not fully charge the iDEN Lithium  
Ion battery or may yield a reduced number of  
lifetime charge cycles.  
Standard  
Lithium Ion  
2 hours  
For best results, charge the batteries within the  
temperature range of 50°F to 104°F (10°C to  
40°C).  
•
•
Extreme temperatures degrade battery  
performance. Do not store the battery where  
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C) or fall below  
4°F (-20°C).  
Lithium Ion batteries have a self discharge rate  
and without use, lose about 1% of their charge  
per day.  
Prolonged charging is not recommended.  
5
   
Powering On and Off  
•
The battery capacity is degraded if the battery is  
stored for long periods while fully charged. If  
long term storage is required, store at half  
capacity.  
To power your phone off:  
1 Open the flip.  
2 Press and hold p.  
Activating Service  
The first time you power your phone on, your  
service is activated.  
Powering On and Off  
To power your phone on:  
1 Open the flip.  
A screen then appears prompting you to select Ok  
to update your browser information, which enables  
security. This screen will only appear during initial  
activation.  
Tip: Press the flip open button to open the flip  
easily.  
2 Press p.  
Note: When powering on, if you press p for  
more than 5 seconds, you will turn off  
calls and other transmissions. See  
“Temporarily Turning Off Transmissions”  
on page 181.  
Enabling Security  
You must enable security the first time you power  
on your phone or within 10 days of first activation of  
your phone.  
As your phone connects to the network, you will  
see a connecting message. When the idle screen  
appears, the phone is ready to use.  
1 Press A under Ok.  
2 You are prompted to enable security. Press A  
under Yes. A series of screens followed by the  
default homepage displays.  
3 Press e to return to the idle screen.  
6
               
Getting Started  
3 Press O.  
4 Scroll to see your information:  
Phone Programming  
Within 24 hours of enabling security, you will  
receive an alert notification containing your  
Personal Telephone Number (PTN), BoostTM  
Customer Care number and BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
number.  
Line 1 is your phone number. Walkie-Talkie # is  
your BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number, the number  
that others use to contact you using BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie service. These numbers appear  
when you receive your alert notification after  
enabling security on your phone.  
1 When you receive an alert notification saying  
New Browser Message - Receive  
Programming Info, press A under Goto.  
2 You are prompted to accept changes to your  
lists. Press A under Ok.  
3 You are prompted again to accept changes to  
your lists. Press A under Ok.  
4 A confirmation screen displays. Press A under  
Ok.  
See “My Info” on page 136 for more information  
about this feature.  
BoostTM Voice Mail  
You must set up your voice mail box before you  
can retrieve messages. See “Setting Up Your  
Voice Mail Box” on page 108.  
5 Press e to return to the idle screen.  
Customizing Features  
Finding Your Phone Number  
and BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
Number  
You can control many features of your phone,  
including the size of the text on the display, the way  
you access main menu items, and the volume of  
incoming sound, rings, and other tones. See  
“Customizing Your Phone” on page 179.  
My Info lets you view your phone number, BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number, and other phone  
information.  
1 Press m to access the main menu.  
2 Scroll to My Info.  
7
           
Phone Basics  
The screen shown above is the idle screen. The  
idle screen appears when your phone is on, but not  
engaged in any activity.  
Phone Basics  
Flip Open Button  
Text Area  
This area displays menus, messages, names,  
phone numbers, and other information.  
The flip open button located on the upper right  
corner of your phone enables you to quickly open  
the flip by pushing the button.  
Display  
Display Options  
Two display options appear at the bottom of most  
screens. You select a display option by pressing  
the option key below it.  
Any time your phone is powered on, the display  
provides you with information and options.  
The external display shows a shortened version of  
the internal display. To see more information, open  
the flip.  
Menus and Lists  
Your phone’s features are arranged in menus,  
submenus, and lists.  
status icons  
text area  
To access the items in a menu or list, scroll using  
the navigation key at the top of your keypad. This  
key lets you scroll up, down, left, or right. Holding  
down the appropriate part of the navigation key  
speeds up scrolling.  
In this guide, this symbol > tells you to select a  
menu or list item. For example, Settings >  
Security means:  
menu icon  
display options  
1 Scroll to Settings on the main menu.  
2 Press O to see the Settings screen.  
3 Scroll to Security.  
8
               
Getting Started  
4 Press O to see the Security screen.  
Main Menu  
All your phone’s features can be accessed through  
the main menu. You can set the main menu to  
appear as a list or as large icons (see “Setting the  
Menu View” on page 180).  
OK Key  
Pressing O:  
•
•
•
•
•
Selects the highlighted menu item or list item  
Sets options  
Confirms actions  
Re-Boost  
Web  
Recharge your account from  
your phone. See page 18.  
Access to BoostTM Wireless  
Web Services. See page 116.  
Places and answer calls  
From the idle screen, accesses the Audio  
Player. This is the default setting. You can  
assign a different main menu item to O.  
BoostLIVE  
Access to boostLIVE for the  
latest list of entertainment  
applications.  
Menu Key  
Java® Apps  
Settings  
Java® applications on your  
phone. See page 154.  
Many features provide context-sensitive menus  
that let you access related features and actions.  
This icon S appears any time a context-sensitive  
menu is available. Press m to access the menu.  
Customize your phone. See  
page 179.  
Ringtones  
Audio Player  
Media Center  
Assign ringtones and turn  
ringer off. See page 82.  
Access the MP3 audio player.  
See page 39.  
Access stored pictures, and  
audio recordings. See  
page 126.  
9
       
Phone Basics  
Store a number to access  
later. For information on  
Memo, see “Memo” on page  
67.  
Camera  
Access camera and take  
pictures. See page 118.  
Memo  
Bluetooth®  
My Info  
Connect to a device with  
Bluetooth®. See page 143.  
Call Timers  
Recent Calls  
Shortcuts  
Profiles  
Phone usage information. See  
page 72.  
View personal phone  
information, including phone  
number and Walkie-Talkie  
number. See page 7.  
Lists recent calls. See  
page 50.  
VoiceRecord  
GPS  
Record and play audio  
messages. See page 151.  
Create shortcuts to screens.  
See page 190.  
Find your approximate  
geographical location. See  
page 164.  
Groups of settings you apply  
together. See page 186.  
Call Alert  
Lists call alerts. See page 48.  
Contacts  
Create, view, store, edit  
Contacts and Groups. See  
page 58.  
Quick Access to Main Menu Items  
Each arrow in the navigation key and O can be  
used to access a main menu item from the idle  
screen. Each of these keys is assigned to a main  
menu item when you receive your phone. To  
assign different main menu items, see “Personalize  
Features” on page 183.  
Messages  
Call Forward  
Datebook  
Access messages. See  
page 78.  
Set call forwarding options.  
See page 68.  
Schedule appointments. See  
page 173.  
10  
 
Getting Started  
Status Icons  
Active Phone Line — 1 indicates  
phone line 1 is ready to make calls;  
2 indicates phone line 2 is ready to  
make calls.  
1 2  
Status icons appear at the top of the display. Some  
appear at all times. Others appear only when your  
phone is engaged in certain activities or when you  
have activated certain features.  
Call Forward — Your phone is set  
to forward calls. See “Call  
Forwarding” on page 68.  
G L  
I J  
H K  
Battery Strength — A fuller battery  
indicates a greater charge.  
abcd  
efgd  
Ringer Off — Your phone is set to  
not ring. See “Setting Your Phone to  
Vibrate” on page 82.  
Speaker Off — Sets BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie sound to come  
through the earpiece rather than  
through the speaker. Your phone  
does not ring for BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie calls if Alert Type is  
set to Silent or Vibrate.  
QRM  
Signal Strength — More bars next  
to the antenna indicate a stronger  
signal.  
o p q  
r s  
u
6
No Service — Your phone is  
without service. You cannot make  
or receive any type of call.  
Phone In Use — Your phone is  
active on a phone call.  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie In Use —  
Your phone is active on a BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie call.  
A
B
Messages — You have one or  
more messages. See page 78.  
w xT  
yz  
T9® Text Input — You are using T9  
Text Input to enter text. See  
“Entering Text” on page 55.  
B
Bluetooth® In Use — Your phone  
is using Bluetooth®. If this icon is  
blinking, then your phone is in  
discoverable mode. If this icon is  
static, your phone is active in a  
Bluetooth® connection.  
ljik  
mXnW  
11  
   
Using Easy Media CreatorTM  
Using the Memory Card  
Your i875 phone comes with a 32 MB memory  
card, memory card reader, and memory card  
adaptor.  
Internet — You are ready to  
browse the internet or are browsing  
the internet using a secure  
connection.  
DE  
9
Transmitters — Your phone is set  
not to receive calls and other  
transmissions. See “Temporarily  
Turning Off Transmissions” on page  
181.  
A memory card is a removable flash memory card  
that you can use to store pictures, videos, and  
audio files. The memory card can be inserted in  
your phone or connected to your computer using  
the memory card reader and memory card adaptor.  
Packet Data — You are ready to  
transfer packet data or are  
transferring packet data. See “Using  
Your Phone as a Modem” on page  
73.  
When the memory card is in your phone, many  
types of pictures, videos, and audio files stored on  
the memory card can be view or played using your  
phone's Media Center. MP3 audio files stored on  
the memory card can be played using your phone's  
audio player.  
Y Z  
TTY — You are ready to use your  
phone to make calls using a  
teletypewriter device. See “Making  
TTY Calls” on page 74.  
N O  
For complete instructions on using the memory  
card with your phone and with your computer, see  
“Memory Card” on page 26.  
7
Hearing Aid — Your phone is set  
for use with a hearing aid and is  
active on a phone call.  
Using Easy Media CreatorTM  
Your i875 phone comes with Roxio's Easy Media  
CreatorTM CD. With Easy Media CreatorTM, you can  
make your own MP3 files from tracks on your audio  
CDs, which you can then transfer to your i875  
phone using the memory card that comes with your  
phone. For complete instructions, see “Easy Media  
CreatorTM” on page 33.  
435  
Audio Player — The audio player  
is active.  
Voice Record — You have one or  
more voice records stored. See  
page 151.  
c
12  
     
Getting Started  
Note: If a SIM PIN is required, your phone will  
not function until the SIM PIN is entered,  
except for making emergency calls.  
SIM Card Security  
Your SIM card stores all your Contacts and  
protects your personal information. Since this  
information is stored on your SIM card, not in your  
phone, you can remove the information by  
removing your SIM card.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Security > SIM PIN.  
2 Select On or Off.  
3 Enter the current SIM PIN.  
Note: The default SIM PIN is 0000. Change your  
PIN to prevent fraudulent use of the SIM  
card (see “Changing the PIN” on page  
14).  
Note: Except for making emergency calls, your  
phone will not function without the SIM  
card.  
To prevent unauthorized use of your phone, your  
SIM card is protected by a PIN that you enter each  
time the phone is powered on. You can change the  
PIN or turn off the requirement that it be entered.  
4 Press A under Ok.  
Entering the PIN  
1 When the Enter SIM PIN Code screen appears  
after you power on your phone, enter your SIM  
PIN.  
Turning the PIN Requirement On and  
Off  
When the SIM PIN requirement is off, your phone  
can be used without entering a PIN.  
2 Press A under Ok.  
The message SIM Unlocked displays.  
Important: When the SIM PIN requirement is off,  
the personal data on your SIM card is  
not protected. Anyone can use your  
Important: If you enter your PIN incorrectly 3 times,  
your SIM card is blocked. To unblock  
your SIM card, you must contact  
phone and access your personal data.  
TM  
Boost Customer Care. See  
When the SIM PIN requirement is on, you are  
prompted to enter your PIN each time you power  
on your phone.  
“Unblocking the PIN”.  
13  
         
SIM Card Security  
Important: If you unsuccessfully enter the PUK  
code 10 times, your SIM card is  
permanently blocked and must be  
replaced. If this happens, all data is  
lost. You will get a message to contact  
BoostTM Customer Care. Except for  
making emergency calls, your phone  
will not function with a blocked SIM  
card.  
Changing the PIN  
Note: The SIM PIN requirement must be turned  
on in order to access this feature.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Security > Change Passwords > SIM PIN.  
2 At the Enter Old SIM PIN screen, enter the  
current SIM PIN.  
3 Press A under Ok.  
4 At the Enter New SIM PIN screen, enter the  
new 4- to 8-digit SIM PIN.  
To unblock the PIN:  
1 Press * # m 1.  
2 At your BoostTM Customer Care representative’s  
request, provide the information needed to give  
you a PUK code.  
5 Press A under Ok.  
6 At the Re-enter New SIM PIN screen, re-enter  
the new SIM PIN to confirm.  
3 Select Unblock PIN.  
4 Enter the PUK code.  
5 Enter a new 4- to 8-digit SIM PIN.  
6 Re-enter your SIM PIN.  
7 Press A under Ok.  
Changed: SIM PIN displays.  
Unblocking the PIN  
If you enter your PIN incorrectly 3 times, your SIM  
card is blocked. To unblock your SIM card, you  
must contact BoostTM Customer Care to get a PIN  
Unblock Code (PUK).  
Note: These steps must be performed in quick  
succession.  
If you entered the codes properly, SIM Unlocked  
appears on the display.  
14  
         
Getting Started  
•
Pictures, video, and audio recordings accessible  
through the Media Center that are saved in your  
phone’s memory, except those that are forward  
locked. (No items saved to the memory card are  
erased.)  
Inserting and Removing Your SIM  
Card  
Important: Do not touch the gold-colored areas of  
your SIM card.  
The SIM card is designed for optimal Contacts  
storage and feature use. For Boost Mobile® SIM  
card compatibility information, visit  
•
•
•
•
•
3 most recent GPS Enabled locations  
Voice records  
Voice names  
Datebook events  
Options set using the Personalize menu  
www.boostmobile.com/sim.  
Note: In some cases, Contacts and Groups may  
not be accessible if you move your SIM  
card to another phone. Contacts and  
Groups created with your i875 phone are  
not readable by an older iDEN SIM-based  
phone.  
Inserting Your SIM Card  
1 With your phone powered off, remove the  
battery door and battery.  
2 Slide the latch away from the SIM card holder  
If you remove your SIM card and use it with  
another phone, or use another SIM card with your  
phone, the following information is erased:  
latch  
•
•
•
•
•
•
The recent calls list  
Call forwarding settings  
Net alerts  
MMS messages  
Options set using the MMS Setup menu  
Information stored in Memo  
15  
   
SIM Card Security  
3 Open the SIM card holder.  
5 Close the SIM card holder.  
6 Slide the latch toward the SIM card holder.  
4 Carefully slide your SIM card into the SIM card  
holder.  
Removing Your SIM Card  
Important: To avoid loss or damage, do not remove  
your SIM card from your phone unless  
absolutely necessary.  
1 With your phone powered off, remove the  
battery door and battery.  
2 Slide the latch away from the SIM card holder.  
3 Open the SIM card holder.  
4 Carefully slide your SIM card out of the SIM card  
holder.  
5 Close the SIM card holder.  
6 Slide the latch toward the SIM card holder.  
Note: Protect your SIM card as you would any  
delicate object. Store it carefully.  
16  
 
Getting Started  
2 To lock the keypad immediately, select Lock  
Now. You will be given the option to press m and  
* to lock and unlock the keypad.  
3 To set a specific time for the keypad to lock if  
there has been no activity, select Auto Lock and  
then select a time.  
Locking the Keypad  
Locking the phone’s keypad prevents its buttons  
from being pressed. When the keypad is locked,  
you can only:  
•
•
•
Power the phone on and off  
Unlock the keypad  
Respond to incoming calls, messages, and  
alerts  
The keypad can be set to lock in 5, 10, 15, or 20  
minutes if the keypad is not touched during the  
specified time. To turn the auto lock off, repeat  
step 3 and select Off.  
Important: Emergency calls cannot be placed while  
the keypad is locked.  
Antenna  
The retractable antenna on your i875 phone is  
designed to be extended during calls.  
To lock the keypad:  
1 From the idle screen, press m.  
2 Press *.  
To extend the antenna, pull gently on the tip until  
the antenna is fully extended and clicks into  
position.  
If you press a key while the keypad is locked,  
instructions for unlocking the keypad display  
briefly.  
When finished with a call, retract the antenna by  
pushing gently on the rounded tip until the antenna  
clicks into place.  
To unlock the keypad:  
1 From the idle screen, press m.  
2 Press *.  
To optimize your phone’s performance, extend the  
antenna when you make or receive a call, and  
avoid touching the antenna with any body part.  
You also have the option of setting your phone to  
automatically lock the keypad if there has been no  
activity for a specified time.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Security > Keypad Lock.  
17  
         
Accessories  
Important: Failure to fully extend or retract the  
antenna until the antenna clicks into  
place causes severely degraded  
performance, which may result in  
missed calls, dropped calls, or garbled  
audio.  
Wireless Local Number  
Portability: Bringing Your  
Phone Number From Another  
Carrier  
Please contact BoostTM Customer Care for  
information about this service.  
Accessories  
Your phone comes with a Standard Lithium Ion  
Battery and mid rate travel charger.  
Re-BoostTM  
Various accessories are available for use with your  
i875 phone, cases, vehicle power charger, data  
cables, Hands-Free accessories and more.  
You can recharge your account directly from your  
handset using the Re-BoostTM menu option. On  
your phone, launch the service from the main  
menu. You will then be able to log on and  
recharge your account using your credit card or  
Re-Boost® Card. You can also view your account  
balance and call credit expiration date. The  
account pass code is the same one that you use to  
access your account.  
To order additional accessories, go to  
www.boostmobile.com or call 1-888-BOOST4U  
(1-888-266-7848). You can also contact your  
BoostTM Authorized Dealership. For information on  
BoostTM retail store locations, go to  
www.boostmobile.com.  
Instant Re-BoostTM  
You can Re-BoostTM instantly by dialing the letters  
ADD from your mobile phone and press Send. You  
are not required to enter your PTN or pass code.  
18  
         
Getting Started  
If you select Prepaid Card, you will be asked to  
enter the 14-digit card number printed on the  
Re-Boost® Card. If you've selected credit card, you  
will be asked simply to confirm your purchase. You  
will need to have a credit card already on file to use  
it for purchasing airtime. Call 1-888-BOOST-4U to  
have your credit card added to your account.  
BoostTM Customer Care  
BoostTM Customer Care: 1-888-BOOST-4U  
(1-888-266-7848) or dial 611 from your i875  
phone.  
19  
 
With the Flip Closed  
Making Calls  
You can make phone calls with the flip closed  
using a voice name or the recent calls list to select  
the number you want to call. See “Using a Voice  
Name” on page 23 and “Making Calls From the  
Recent Calls List” on page 53.  
Your i875 phone makes two types of calls: digital  
cellular phone calls and BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
calls. With BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls, you use  
your phone as a long-range, digital walkie-talkie.  
To end the call, press ..  
Phone Calls  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie Calls  
With the Flip Open  
1 If the flip is open, enter the BoostTM  
1 Enter the number you want to call.  
2 To place the call:  
Walkie-Talkie number you want to call. -or-  
If the flip is closed, choose the number as you  
would when making a phone call.  
Press s. -or-  
If you entered the number from the idle screen,  
press O.  
2 Press and hold the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button  
on the side of your phone. Begin talking after  
your phone emits a chirping sound.  
3 Release the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button to  
listen.  
3 To end the call:  
Press e. -or-  
Close the flip.  
4 To end the call:  
To end a call by closing the flip, you must have the  
Flip to End feature turned on (see “Setting Flip  
Actions” on page 71).  
If the flip is closed, press .. -or-  
Press e. -or-  
Press A under Exit. -or-  
Close the flip.  
20  
             
Making Calls  
A BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call ends automatically if  
there is no activity on the call for a few seconds.  
Receiving Calls  
Phone Calls  
When you receive a phone call, your phone rings,  
vibrates, or lights up its backlight.  
Tip: To let someone know you want to talk to  
him or her on a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call,  
send a call alert. See “Call Alerts” on page  
48.  
Answering  
Dialing BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
Numbers  
Every BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number has 3 parts —  
an area ID, a network ID, and a member ID — with  
an asterisk between each of these parts. For  
example: 999*999*9999.  
When you place a BoostTM walkie-talkie call, you  
must enter the whole BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
number including the asterisks.  
Tip: When you store a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
number in Contacts it is good practice to  
include the whole BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
number including the asterisks in case you  
travel with your phone, or another BoostTM  
walkie-talkie user whom you are trying to  
reach travels with their phone, outside of  
your network.  
If the flip is closed, press t. -or-  
Open the flip. -or-  
Press s. -or-  
Press O. -or-  
Press A under Yes. -or-  
Press any number key.  
To answer a call by opening the flip, you must have  
the Flip to Ans feature turned on (see “Setting Flip  
Actions” on page 71). To answer a call by pressing  
any number key, you must have the Any Key Ans  
feature turned on (see “Phone Calls Features” on  
page 182).  
Sending to Voice Mail  
If the flip is closed, press .. -or-  
Press e. -or-  
Press A under No.  
21  
           
Choosing a Number to Call  
Ending  
If the flip is closed, press .. -or-  
Choosing a Number to Call  
You can choose the number you want to call in  
many ways:  
Press e. -or-  
Close the flip.  
•
•
Enter the number on the keypad.  
Say a voice name into your phone. See “Using a  
Voice Name” on page 23.  
Use Speed Dial or Turbo Dial® to make a phone  
call. See “Using Speed Dial and Turbo Dial®” on  
page 23.  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie Calls  
When you receive a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call,  
your phone emits a chirping sound or vibrates.  
•
Answering  
•
•
Redial the last phone number called. See  
“Redialing the Last Number” on page 23.  
Select the number from the recent calls list. See  
“Making Calls From the Recent Calls List” on  
page 53.  
Select the number from Contacts. See “Making  
Calls From Contacts” on page 65.  
Select a number stored in Datebook. See  
“Making Calls From Datebook and Datebook  
Reminders” on page 177.  
Use One Touch BoostTM walkie-talkie to make a  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call. See “One Touch  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie (WT)” on page 71.  
Use the number in Memo. See “Memo” on page  
67.  
1 Wait for the caller to finish speaking.  
2 Press and hold the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button  
on the side of your phone. Begin talking after  
your phone emits a chirping sound.  
3 Release the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button to  
listen.  
•
•
Ending  
If the flip is closed, press .. -or-  
Press e. -or-  
•
•
Press A under Exit. -or-  
Close the flip.  
A BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call ends automatically if  
there is no activity on the call for a few seconds.  
22  
     
Making Calls  
Using Speed Dial and Turbo Dial®  
Each phone number stored in Contacts is assigned  
a Speed Dial number, which you can use to call  
that number.  
•
Select the number in a text message you have  
received.  
Using a Voice Name  
If you have created a voice name in Contacts for  
the number you want to call, say the voice name  
into your phone to enter the number. See page 60  
for information on voice names.  
Speed Dial  
1 From the idle screen, use the keypad to enter  
the Speed Dial number assigned to the phone  
number you want to call.  
You can use a voice name to enter a number with  
the flip open or closed.  
2 Press #.  
3 Press s.  
1 Press and hold t until a prompt appears telling  
you to say the voice name.  
Turbo Dial  
2 Speaking into the microphone, say the voice  
name assigned to the number you want to call.  
From the idle screen, press and hold the Speed  
Dial number (1 through 9) assigned to the phone  
number you want to call.  
Your phone plays the name back to you.  
3 If you are making a phone call, the call is placed  
Using One Touch BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie  
One Touch BoostTM walkie-talkie sets your phone  
to call the most recent BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
number on the recent calls list, or a BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number you choose, every time you  
press the BoostTM walkie-talkie button. See “Setting  
One Touch BoostTM Walkie-Talkie” on page 71.  
automatically.  
Tip: To stop a phone call from being completed,  
press . if the flip is closed or press e.  
If you are making a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call,  
press and hold the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button  
to place the call.  
Redialing the Last Number  
Press and hold s to place a call to the last phone  
number you called.  
23  
         
Missed Phone Calls  
With the Flip Closed  
Missed Phone Calls  
When you miss a call, this icon V and the number  
of phone calls you have missed appear briefly.  
When you make a call with the flip closed,  
speakerphone is always on.  
Opening the flip turns speakerphone off.  
With the Flip Open  
Using Mute  
Muting calls lets you listen to incoming sound  
without transmitting sound. Mute is available  
whenever you are on an active call.  
If you want to dismiss the missed call message,  
press A under Back. -or-  
If you want to view the missed call on the recent  
calls list, press A under View.  
With the Flip Closed  
To turn mute on:  
If you want to dismiss the missed call message,  
Press A under Mute.  
press ..  
While mute is on, Unmute appears as a display  
option.  
If you want to view the missed call on the recent  
calls list, press . twice.  
To turn mute off:  
Press A under Unmute.  
Using Speakerphone  
Turning on speakerphone makes incoming sound  
come out of the phone’s speaker instead of the  
earpiece. Speakerphone is available whenever you  
are on an active phone call.  
Making Emergency Phone  
Calls  
Your phone supports emergency calling.  
With the Flip Open  
Emergency phone calls can be made even when  
your SIM card is blocked or not in your phone.  
To turn speakerphone on or off:  
Press A under Spkr. -or-  
Press t.  
Dial 911 to be connected to an emergency  
response center. If you are on an active call, you  
must end it before calling 911.  
24  
             
Making Calls  
When you make an emergency call, your phone’s  
GPS Enabled feature can help emergency service  
personnel find you, if you are in a location where  
your phone's GPS antenna has established a clear  
view of the open sky and your local emergency  
response center has the equipment to process  
location information. See “GPS (Global Positioning  
System) Enabled” on page 164, and particularly  
“IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind” on page  
164 and “Making an Emergency Call” on page 166,  
for more information on the limitations of this  
feature. Because of the limitations of this feature,  
always provide your best knowledge of your  
location to the emergency response center when  
you make an emergency call.  
Important: Emergency calls cannot be placed while  
the keypad is locked.  
Important: If you have not registered on the  
network, emergency calls cannot be  
placed while your SIM card is in your  
phone.  
Important: If you are bringing your phone number  
®
to Boost Mobile from your previous  
carrier, the 911 emergency response  
center will not be able to make a  
callback to your temporary Boost  
Mobile® phone number after the phone  
number you requested has been  
®
activated on your Boost Mobile phone.  
25  
 
Your i870 phone also comes with a CD containing  
software that lets you convert the songs on your  
audio CDs to MP3 files that you can play using  
using your phone's audio player. For information  
on installing and using this software, see “Easy  
Media Creator” on page 42.  
Memory Card  
Your i875 phone comes with a 32 MB memory  
card, memory card reader, and memory card  
adaptor.  
A memory card is a removable flash memory card  
that you can use to store pictures, videos, and  
audio files. The memory card can be inserted in  
your phone or connected to your computer using  
the memory card reader and memory card adaptor.  
Ensuring Files on the Memory  
Card Are Compatible With  
Your Phone  
When your memory card is connected to your  
computer, your computer lets you save files to your  
memory card in ways that may not allow you to  
access these files when the memory card is in your  
i875 phone.  
When the memory card is in your phone, many  
types of pictures, videos, and audio files stored on  
the memory card can be viewed or played using  
your phone's Media Center. MP3 audio files stored  
on the memory card can be played using your  
phone's audio player.  
To ensure the files on your memory card are  
compatible with your i875 phone, use the folder  
structure, filename rules, and formats described in  
the following sections.  
A memory card reader connects to your computer’s  
USB port and lets you access the memory card  
from your computer. This lets you save files from  
your computer to your memory card or save files  
from your memory card to your computer.  
The memory card adaptor makes the memory card  
compatible with the memory card reader.  
26  
         
Memory Card  
Folder Structure  
File Formats  
The first time you insert the memory card into your  
phone, three folders are created: Audio, Images,  
and Video. In order to access files stored on the  
memory card, you must store the given file in its  
corresponding format folder: audio files to the  
Audio folder, pictures to the Images folder, and  
videos to the Video folder.  
Audio Player  
These MP3 file formats are compatible with your  
phone’s audio player:  
MP3 version  
MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-2.5.  
Bit Rates  
(kbits/sec)  
32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,  
128,160, 192.  
Because your phone creates these folders the first  
time the memory card is inserted, you should insert  
the memory card into your phone at least once  
before using it with your computer.  
Sampling Rates 8, 11.025, 12,16, 22.05, 24, 32,  
(KHz) 44.1, 48.  
Channel mode Stereo and Mono.  
Filename Rules  
Metadata tags  
ID3v1.1, ID3v2.3  
When naming files stored on the memory card, the  
following rules apply:  
Media Center  
These types of video files are compatible with the  
video playback capabilities of your phone’s Media  
Center:  
•
•
The filename can only contain ASCII characters.  
The filename can be up to 32 characters long,  
including the file extension.  
Video Formats MPEG-4, H.263.  
Audio Formats AMR-NB.  
Bit Rates  
(kbits/sec)  
Up to 128.  
27  
 
Using the Memory Card With Your Phone  
These types of audio files and picture files are  
compatible with the Media Center:  
2 Slide in the memory card. Push the memory  
card into the slot until it clicks into place.  
File Type  
Task  
Formats  
Audio  
Playback  
MIDI (FM-Midi, Type-0, 16  
Polyphony, SP-Midi  
compliant), WAV (8 kHz,  
8-bit Mono PCM Canonical  
Format), AMR, AU, MP3  
Picture  
View  
GIF (GIF89A and GIF87A),  
JPEG, WBMP, PNG  
Using the Memory Card With  
Your Phone  
Inserting the Memory Card  
3 Close the memory card slot cover.  
4 Your phone may prompt you to use the memory  
card to store new media items, go to the audio  
player, go to the camera, go to the Media  
Center, or do nothing. If you select Do  
Nothing, you will return to the idle screen.  
Respond to the prompt now.  
1 Open the memory card slot cover.  
Formatting a New Card  
The memory card that came with your i875 phone  
has the format required for use with your phone.  
However, if you use another memory card with  
your phone, you may be prompted to format the  
card the first time you insert it in your phone.  
28  
   
Memory Card  
Important: The Format option erases any data  
saved to the memory card. It should  
only be if your phone prompts you to  
format the memory card.  
Setting Your Storage Preference  
You can choose whether media items are saved to  
your phone’s memory or to the memory card.  
To set the media storage option in Settings:  
To fomat a memory card:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
From the main menu, select Settings >  
Advanced > Memory Card > Store Media.  
Advanced > Memory Card > Format.  
2 Select On Phone to set your phone to save  
media items to the phone’s memory. -or-  
Accessing Files on the Memory Card  
Pictures, videos, and audio files stored on the  
memory card are accessed using your phone's  
Media Center.  
Select Prefer On Card to set your phone to  
save media items to the memory card if it is in  
the phone. If the memory card is not in the  
phone, even if you choose Prefer On Card, the  
media items are saved to your phone’s memory.  
MP3 audio files stored on the memory card can be  
played using your phone's audio player.  
If you set the media storage option to set to save to  
your phone’s memory, when you insert the  
memory card your phone prompts you to switch to  
storing to the memory card.  
Saving Files to the Memory Card  
When the memory card is in your phone, you can  
save these media items to it:  
•
•
Pictures received in BoostTMWalkie-Talkie calls  
Pictures and videos taken with your phone’s  
camera  
•
•
Pictures sent via Bluetooth®  
Pictures, videos, and audio recordings received  
in MMS messages  
29  
   
Using the Memory Card With Your Phone  
4 Pull out the memory card.  
Removing the Memory Card  
Important: Do not remove the memory card before  
selecting the Remove option. Removing  
the memory card before selecting the  
Remove option could result in loss of  
data.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Advanced > Memory Card > Remove Card.  
2 Open the memory card slot cover.  
5 Close the memory card slot cover.  
Note: If you select the Memory Card > Remove  
option but do not remove the memory  
card, you cannot use the memory card  
until you remove it and insert it again.  
3 Push the memory card to release it from the slot.  
30  
 
Memory Card  
Setting Up the Memory Card Reader  
1 To connect the memory card reader, insert its  
USB connector into the USB port on your  
computer.  
Using the Memory Card With  
Your Computer  
When the memory card reader is set up as  
described here, it is treated as a removable  
storage drive by your computer. You can navigate  
to this drive as you would any other drive on your  
computer.  
Note: These instructions refer to the memory  
card reader that came with your i875  
phone. If you are using a different memory  
card reader, following the instructions  
provided with that memory card reader.  
You can also use the USB cable provided with  
the memory card reader to connect the memory  
card reader to the USB port on your computer.  
Connect one end of the USB cable to the USB  
connector on the memory card reader and  
connect the other end to the USB port on your  
computer.  
What Is Your Computer’s Operating  
System?  
If you have any of these operating systems running  
on your computer, you do not need any additional  
software to install the memory card reader:  
®
•
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP. or  
Windows ME  
•
MAC OS 8.6 or later  
If you have Microsoft Windows 98SE, download  
and install the Windows 98SE driver from this Web  
site before setting up the memory card reader:  
http://commerce.motorola.com/consumer/QWht  
ml/USB-SDdrivers.html  
31  
 
Other Memory Cards Compatible with Your Phone  
The green light on the memory card reader turns  
on when the memory card reader is connected.  
Removing the Memory Card From the  
Memory Card Reader  
When you are ready to use the memory card with  
the your phone again, pull the memory card from  
the memory card adaptor and insert it into your  
phone.  
2 Insert the memory card into the memory card  
adaptor until it does not go in any further.  
Note: When you read or write files to your from  
the memory card using the memory card  
reader, the green light on the memory  
card reader flashes rapidly to show that it  
is in use. Do not remove the card while  
the green light is flashing.  
3 Insert the memory card adaptor into the memory  
card reader.  
Other Memory Cards  
Compatible with Your Phone  
If you want to purchase and use additional memory  
cards, Transflash and MicroSD memory cards are  
compatible with your i875 phone.  
Your memory card can now be accessed by your  
computer.  
32  
 
Easy Media CreatorTM  
Installation  
To use Easy Media CreatorTM Classic, install Easy  
Media CreatorTM 7.  
Note: Music or other audio works (whether  
originating from CDs, MP3s or some other  
source) may be copyrighted.  
Requirements  
To take full advantage of all of the features of Easy  
Media CreatorTM 7, your computer must meet the  
following minimum system requirements:  
Unauthorized downloading, copying,  
editing, distribution, or other use of such  
material may be contrary to the provisions  
of the United States copyright laws. This  
software should only be used for your  
personal, noncommercial purposes.  
®
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows 2000 (service pack 4 or  
later) or Windows XP (service pack 1 or later)  
With Roxio’s Easy Media CreatorTM Classic, you  
can make your own MP3 files from tracks on your  
audio CDs. This process is commonly referred to  
as encoding or ripping MP3 files.  
®
500 MHz Intel Pentium III or equivalent; 128  
MB RAM  
1 GB available hard disk space for typical  
installation of all components  
You can save these MP3 files directly to the  
memory card that came with your i875 phone or  
save them to your computer’s hard drive and copy  
them to the memory card later.  
Note: To recieve CDDB support, which lets you  
retrieve CD artist, album, and track  
information over the Internet, you must  
have an Internet connection.  
For Easy Media CreatorTM 7’s video and DVD  
capabilities, your computer must meet the following  
minimum system requirements:  
To save files to the memory card, you must have  
the memory card reader that came with your i875  
phone connected to your computer, as described  
in “Memory Card” on page 35.  
Note: For MAC users: If you are currently not  
using Roxio’s TOAST product, please go  
to www.roxio.com/toast to purchase the  
Toast product from Roxio.  
•
1 GB available hard disk space for every 5  
minutes of video for video capture  
4.5 GB available hard disk space for copying  
DVD-Video discs  
•
33  
           
Installing Easy Media CreatorTM  
7
Unintalling Easy Media CreatorTM  
1 Choose one of the following ways to open the  
Add/Remove Programs dialog box:  
7
•
Display setting of 1024 X 768; 16-bit color  
graphics card (24-bit or 32bit true color  
recommended)  
In Windows XP: Choose Start > Control  
Panel, and then double-click Add or Remove  
Programs.  
Installing Easy Media  
CreatorTM  
7
1 Insert the Easy Media CreatorTM 7 Program CD  
into your CD or DVD drive.  
In Windows 2000: Choose Start > Settings >  
Control Panel, and then double-click  
Add/Remove Programs.  
2 Select Roxio Easy Media CreatorTM 7, and then  
click Remove.  
3 Click Yes to confirm that you want to remove  
Easy Media CreatorTM 7, and then follow the  
instructions that appear on the screen.  
If Autorun is enabled on your computer, the  
Easy Media CreatorTM 7 installation window  
appears automatically and you can skip step 2  
and step 3.  
2 Choose Start > Run.  
3 Type d:\setup (substitute the appropriate letter  
of your CD or DVD drive for d).  
4 Follow the installation instructions that appear  
on the screen.  
34  
 
Easy Media CreatorTM  
Starting Easy Media CreatorTM  
7
The Home Screen is the starting point that lets you  
access the components and tools you need for all  
of your digital media projects.  
Setting the Best Options for Your  
Phone’s Audio Player  
When converting audio CD tracks to MP3 files for  
your i875 phone, certain file creation options  
provide you with the best experience when playing  
those MP3 files on your i875 phone’s audio player.  
To access the Home Screen:  
To set these options:  
Choose Start > Programs > Roxio Easy Media  
Creator 7 Basic VCD Edition. -or-  
1 In the Creator Classic window, choose Tools >  
Options.  
Choose Start > Programs > Roxio > Roxio  
Easy Media Creator 7 Basic VCD Edition. -or-  
2 In the Classic Creator Options window that  
appears, choose the Copy Tracks from Audio  
CD.  
3 In the File Type list, select an MP3 audio  
encoder format for the files. You must select an  
MP3 encoder to create MP3 files.  
Double-click the Roxio icon on the Windows  
Desktop.  
Making MP3 Files  
Starting Creator Classic  
From the Home Screen, click Creator Classic.  
-or-  
4 In the Audio Format area, select Mono or  
Stereo. Stereo is recommended.  
5 In the Sampling Rate list, select 44100. This  
selects a sampling rate on 44.1 KHz. Your i875  
phone’s audio player supports other sampling  
rates, but 44.1 KHz is recommended.  
6 In the Compression Setting area, select  
Constant Bit Rate. Your i875 phone’s audio  
player supports variable bit rate, but constant bit  
rate is recommended.  
Choose Start > Programs > Roxio > Creator  
Classic.  
The Creator Classic window appears.  
35  
       
Making MP3 Files  
7 In the Compression Setting area, use the  
slider to select a bit rate of 128 kpbs. A higher  
bit rate may produce on MP3 files with best  
sound quality, but it will also increase the size of  
the MP3 files. Your i875 phone’s audio player  
supports more bit rates, but 128 is  
9 Click the OK button in the Classic Creator  
Options window.  
As you gain more experience creating MP3 files for  
your i875 phone, you may want to choose options  
other than the ones recommend here. See “File  
Formats” on page 36 for a list of all formats  
supported.  
recommended.  
8 In the File Naming Structure list, select [title].  
This indicates how you want the MP3 file named  
using the information displayed in the Source  
Pane, located in the upper-right corner of the  
Creator Classic window, when you create the  
MP3 file. Because your i875 phone supports a  
maximum of 32 ASCII characters, naming the  
MP3 file with the title of the track only is  
recommended. Otherwise, the MP3 file may  
need to be renamed before transferring it to the  
i875 phone to avoid truncation of the file name  
when it is displayed by your phone.  
Converting a Track  
1 Insert the audio CD that contains the track you  
want to convert into the CD drive and allow the  
CD to spin-up. A list of the tracks on the CD  
appears in the Source Pane, which is located in  
the upper-right corner of the Classic Creator  
window.  
Note: If the disc information (disc title, artist  
name, and track files) does not display in  
the Source Pane, click the Get Audio CD  
Info button  
to download the  
The extension .mp3 will be the selected File  
Type added to the file name.  
information from the online music  
database on the Internet. If the CD is  
found in the database, the disc title, artist  
name, and track titles are displayed in the  
Source Pane.  
Note: Even when you name an MP3 file using  
the title of the track only, you will not lose  
any of metadata that is displayed in the  
Source Pane with the track, such as artist,  
album, and genre. Your i875 phone’s  
audio player is able to read metadata  
associated with the track regardless of the  
name of the MP3 file.  
If no disc information on a track is  
displayed in the Source Pane, this track  
36  
Easy Media CreatorTM  
will have no metadata converted to MP3  
Where to Find More  
Information  
User Guides  
Each component in Easy Media CreatorTM  
includes a User Guide in PDF format. View the fully  
searchable PDF User Guides online, or print a hard  
copy.  
files. Your i875 phone’s audio player will  
place the track in the folder labelled  
“Unknown”.  
2 In the Source Pane, select or clear the  
checkmarks in the boxes depending on which  
tracks you want to convert.  
7
Note: The tracks you select to convert will  
contain a checkmark in the box.  
To find more information on how to make MP3 files  
using Creator Classic, see “Copying a track to an  
MP3, OGG, WAV or WMA audio file” on page 32 of  
the Creator Classic User Guide.  
3 Click the Copy Tracks from Audio CD button  
. The Copy Tracks from Audio CD dialog  
box appears.  
4 Under Copy To, click Browse to select a  
location to save the MP3 files.  
Note: If you choose to save the MP3 files to the  
memory card now, select the drive called  
“Removable Disk”, expand the folder, and  
then choose the Audio folder on the  
memory card as the location.  
Choose one of the following ways to view a User  
Guide:  
•
From the Home screen, click Help Center, and  
then select the PDF User Guide you want to  
view.  
•
From any component, from the title bar, choose  
Help > Component Help Center, and then click  
View PDF of User Guide.  
5 Click Start. Your audio files will be converted to  
MP3 into your designated destination folder.  
To use the PDF documentation, you must have  
Adobe Reader installed on your system. Adobe  
Reader is free software for viewing and printing  
PDF files on a variety of operating platforms. You  
can download Adobe Reader from the Adobe Web  
site: http://www.adobe.com.  
In the Source Pane, each track you selected to  
convert to a MP3 file will have a blue bar under the  
Progress column showing the ripping process. You  
will see a Completed status next to each track  
when ripping is finished.  
37  
 
Where to Find More Information  
Online Help  
Easy Media CreatorTM 7 Support  
Options  
In addition to the User Guides, each Easy Media  
CreatorTM 7 component has an extensive,  
searchable Help Center. Each Help Center  
includes step-by-step procedures, detailed  
information about the component interface, and  
answers to frequently asked questions.  
Unlimited Complimentary Self Help Options  
Roxio provides Self Help options such as  
frequently asked questions, an extensive database  
of support articles, troubleshooting tips, tutorials,  
documentation and more on the Roxio Web site.  
Registered product owners can also take  
advantage of the Roxio Discussion Groups to get  
help and exchange ideas with other Roxio product  
owners. The Roxio support Web site is located at  
http://support.roxio.com.  
To access the Help Center, from the title bar,  
choose Help > Component Help Center. To view  
context-sensitive help for the activity you are  
currently doing, press F1.  
Roxio Online Support  
If you can’t find the answers you are looking for in  
online help or the User Guides, you can get the  
most current information from the Roxio Web site.  
Alternate Support Options  
Alternate support options like e-mail or telephone  
support will be available to Nextel Customers for a  
period of 1 year from date of purchase. After 1  
year Roxio Support is available on a limited or paid  
basis for your Roxio product. Please visit our Web  
site at http://www.roxio.com/en/support/nextel to  
find out what options are available for your product.  
You can access the Roxio Web site in any of these  
ways:  
•
Click the Roxio logo from any Easy Media  
CreatorTM 7 component window.  
•
Launch your Web browser and go to  
http://www.roxio.com/en/support/nextel  
38  
 
Playing Audio Files with the  
Flip Closed  
The controls on the front of your phone enable you  
to use the audio player with your phone’s flip  
closed:  
Audio Player  
Your i875 phone includes an audio player that you  
can use to play MP3 audio files stored in your  
phone’s memory or on the memory card inserted in  
your phone.  
The audio player groups the MP3 audio files on the  
memory card into folders and lists. When you  
select an audio file to play, the audio player plays  
this audio file and then plays the other audio files  
grouped with it.  
•
To access the audio player, press and hold y  
any time your phone is not in a call or  
transferring data.  
To play an audio file once you have accessed  
the audio player, press y.  
•
•
If you receive a phone call, Walkie-Talkie call, call  
alert, message notification, a Datebook reminder,  
or a GPS notification while playing an audio file  
with the audio player, the audio file pauses and a  
prompt appears asking you if you want to accept  
the incoming call or alert or ignore it.  
To pause an audio file or resume playing it  
again, press y.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
To skip to the next audio file, press z.  
To skip to the previous audio file, press x.  
To fast-forward, press and hold z.  
To rewind, press and hold x.  
To adjust the volume, use the volume keys.  
To exit the audio player, press ..  
The audio player begins playing at the currently  
selected volume, even when Vibe All is set to On.  
39  
           
Playing Audio Files with the Flip Open  
subfolders, this plays the first audio file in the  
Playing Audio Files with the  
Flip Open  
When your phone’s flip is open, you have more  
ways to access the audio player and play the MP3  
audio files on the memory card.  
first of these subfolders.) -or-  
Press O to view the contents of the folder. Then  
scroll to an audio file and press A under Play  
to play it, or scroll to a folder and press A under  
Play to play the first audio file in it.  
Any time you are viewing a list of folders with the  
audio player, you can scroll to a folder and press  
A under Play to start playing the contents of that  
folder or press O to view the contents of the folder.  
Accessing the Audio Player  
From the Main Menu  
From the main menu, select Audio Player.  
From the Media Center  
Any time you are viewing a list of audio files, you  
can scroll to an audio file and press A under Play  
to play it.  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 To view the audio recordings on your memory  
To stop viewing a folder and return to the folder or  
card, press m. Select Filter > Card: Audio.  
list that contains it, press A under Back.  
3 Select [Audio Player] Play Audio Files. -or-  
Other Basic Functions  
Pausing and Resume  
Press A under Player.  
Playing Audio Files  
1 Access the audio player.  
To pause a playing audio file, press A under  
Pause or press O.  
2 Scroll to a folder.  
To resume playing a paused audio file, press A  
Tip: The Songs folder contains all the audio files  
under Play or press O.  
on the memory card in a single list.  
Skip to Next and Skip to Previous  
3 To play the first audio file in the folder, press A  
under Play. (If the folder you scrolled to contains  
To skip to the next audio file, press and release the  
right side of the navigation key, as if scrolling right.  
Do not hold the right side of the navigation key.  
40  
 
Audio Player  
To skip to the previous audio file, press and  
release the left side of the navigation key, as if  
scrolling left. Do not hold the left side of the  
navigation key.  
How Your Audio Files Are  
Organized  
The audio player groups the MP3 audio files on the  
memory card into folders and lists.  
Fast-Forward and Rewind  
To fast-forward a playing audio file, press and hold  
the right side of the navigation key, as if scrolling  
right.  
Since you will probably want to use the audio  
player primarily to play songs, the audio player  
treats the MP3 audio files on the memory card as  
songs when grouping and organizing them.  
To rewind a playing audio file, press and hold the  
left side of the navigation key, as if scrolling left.  
The audio player uses metadata found in most  
MP3 audio files to group the files on the memory  
card by album, artist, and genre. You can also  
create your own groupings of audio files, called  
playlists.  
Adjust the Volume  
To adjust the volume, use the volume keys.  
Exit  
When you access the audio player, you see that  
the audio files are grouped into these folders:  
To exit the audio player, press A under Exit.  
If Exit is not one of your options, press A under  
Back or Cancel until it is.  
•
Songs — All MP3 audio files on the memory  
card inserted in your phone, listed alphabetically  
by title.  
•
Playlists — Folders and lists you have created.  
If you have not created any playlists, this folder  
contains only the Favorite playlist, which is  
empty.  
•
Albums — Songs grouped by album. The  
albums are listed alphabetically by title. The  
songs on the albums are listed in the order that  
they normally appear on the album.  
41  
   
Searching By First Letter  
•
•
Artists — Songs grouped by artist. The artists  
are listed alphabetically by name. Within each  
artist’s folder, the songs are listed alphabetically  
by title.  
Genres — Songs grouped by artist. The artists  
are listed alphabetically by name. Within each  
artist’s folder, the songs are listed alphabetically  
by title.  
If you are not using the repeat or shuffle features,  
the audio player plays the audio file you select and  
then plays the rest of the files in the list or folder, in  
the order they appear, until it gets to the end of the  
list or folder. The audio player then goes to the  
beginning of the list and pauses until you resume  
playing.  
The repeat feature lets you set the audio player to  
play all the audio files in a list or folder, in order,  
starting again at the beginning of the list when it  
gets to the end, without pausing or stopping. It also  
lets you set the audio player to play one audio file  
repeatedly, starting over as soon as it ends.  
In the Albums, Artists, and Genres folders, any  
MP3 audio files that do not contain enough  
metadata to be grouped by album, artist, or genre  
are paced in a folder labelled “Unknown”.  
The shuffle feature lets you set the audio player to  
play the audio files in a list or folder in random  
order, until you stop it.  
Searching By First Letter  
Any time you are viewing an alphabetical list of  
audio files or folders, you can go the items starting  
with any letter by using your phone’s keypad to  
enter that letter.  
Setting Repeat  
1 While viewing a list, viewing the details of the  
audio file currently playing, or viewing visuals,  
press m.  
2 Select Shuffle/Repeat.  
3 Scroll to Repeat.  
4 To set the audio player to repeatedly play the  
contents of a list or folder, in order, select All.  
-or-  
Playing a List, Repeat, and  
Shuffle  
When you select an audio file to play, the audio  
player plays this audio file and then plays the other  
audio files grouped with it. The repeat and shuffle  
features help determine which of these songs are  
played.  
To set the audio player to play one song  
repeatedly, select One. -or-  
42  
     
Audio Player  
To turn off the repeat feature, select Off.  
3 Select [Create New] > Name.  
4 If you want to give the playlist a name, enter the  
name. See “Entering Text” on page 70. When  
you are finished, press A under OK.  
Note: If you do not assign a name, the playlist is  
named “playlist” followed by the number  
of unnamed playlists you have, including  
this one. For example, the first playlist you  
create without naming is automatically  
named “Playlist-1”.  
Setting Shuffle  
1 While viewing a list, viewing the details of the  
audio file currently playing, or viewing visuals,  
press m.  
2 Select Shuffle/Repeat.  
3 Scroll to Shuffle.  
4 To set the audio player to play the audio files in a  
list or folder in random order, select On. -or-  
5 Select [Add Songs].  
To turn off the shuffle feature, select Off.  
A list of all MP3 audio files on the memory card  
appears.  
Working with Playlists  
Playlists are lists of audio files you create from the  
files already available through the audio player.  
Tip: For options to help you sort through this list,  
press m.  
6 Select each audio file you want to put on the  
playlist. A checkmark appears next to each  
selected file.  
Playlists enable you to group audio files as you like  
them, but they do not change anything in the other  
folders or on the memory card. Adding a file to a  
playlist does not copy it or move it. Removing a file  
from a playlist, or deleting the playlist that a file is  
listed in, does not delete the file from any other  
location.  
Tip: To deselect a selected item: Scroll to a  
selected file and press O.  
7 When you are finished selecting files, press A  
under Done.  
8 If you want to change the order of the audio files  
on a playlist, see “Reordering a Playlist” on page  
44.  
Creating a Playlist  
1 Access the audio player.  
2 Select Playlists.  
9 Select Save.  
43  
   
Working with Playlists  
7 Repeat step 3 through step 6 for all the items  
Editing a Playlist  
After you have created a playlist, you can change  
its name, add audio files, remove audio files, and  
change the order of the audio files.  
you want to move.  
8 Press A under Done.  
9 Press A under Save.  
1 Access the audio player.  
2 Select Playlists.  
3 Scroll to the playlist you want to edit.  
4 Press m.  
Removing Audio Files  
You can remove some or all audio files from a  
playlist before you save a new playlist or later,  
while editing the playlist.  
5 Select Edit Playlist.  
6 Make the changes you want.  
7 Select Save.  
Removing an Audio File From a Playlist  
1 Before you have saved a new playlist or while  
editing a playlist, press m.  
2 Scroll to the audio file you want to remove.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Remove Song.  
5 Press A under Save.  
Reordering a Playlist  
You can change the order of the audio files on a  
playlist before you save a new playlist or later,  
while editing the playlist.  
Removing All Audio Files From a Playlist  
1 Before you have saved a new playlist or while  
editing a playlist, press m.  
1 Before you have saved a new playlist or while  
editing a playlist, press m.  
2 Select Reorder Songs.  
3 Scroll to the audio file you want to move.  
4 Press A under Grab.  
5 Scroll to the place where you want the audio file  
to appear.  
2 Select Remove All Songs.  
3 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
4 Press A under Save.  
6 Press A under Insert.  
44  
Audio Player  
Deleting All Playlists  
Reordering Playlists  
1 Access the audio player.  
2 Select Playlists.  
To change the order of the playlists in the Playlists  
folder:  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete All Playlists.  
5 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
1 Access the audio player.  
2 Select Playlists.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Reorder Playlists.  
5 Scroll to the playlist you want to move.  
6 Press A under Grab.  
7 Scroll to the place where you want the playlist to  
appear.  
8 Press A under Insert.  
9 Repeat step 4 through step 8 for all the items  
you want to move.  
This deletes all playlists except the Favorites  
playlist.  
Using the Favorites Playlist  
The Favorites playlist is a permanent playlist. You  
can add audio files, remove audio files, and  
change the order of the audio files, but you cannot  
rename it or delete it.  
You can add audio files to the Favorites playlist as  
you would any other playlist.  
10 Press A under Done.  
Deleting Playlist  
Delete a Playlist  
You can also add audio files to the Favorites  
playlist using the Add to Favorites shortcut.  
Add the Audio File Currently Playing  
1 Access the audio player.  
2 Select Playlists.  
3 Scroll to the playlist you want to delete.  
4 Press m.  
5 Select Delete Playlist.  
6 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
1 While viewing a list, viewing the details of the  
audio file currently playing, or viewing visuals,  
press m.  
2 Select Add to Favorites.  
45  
Deleting Audio Files  
7 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
Add Any Audio File  
1 Access the audio player.  
2 Select Songs.  
3 Scroll to the audio file you want.  
4 Press m.  
Deleting an Album, Artist, or Genre  
1 Access the audio player.  
2 Select the folder containing the audio files you  
want to delete: Albums, Artists, or Genres.  
5 Select Add to Favorites.  
3 Scroll to the album, artist, or genre you want to  
delete.  
Deleting Audio Files  
You can delete audio files from the memory card  
one at a time, by album, by artist, by or genre.  
4 Press m.  
5 Select Delete Album, Delete Artist, or Delete  
Genre.  
6 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
You can also delete all MP3 audio files from the  
memory card by deleting everything in the Songs,  
Albums, Artists, or Genres folder.  
Deleting All MP3 Audio Files  
Deleting everything in the Songs, Albums, Artists,  
or Genres folder deletes all MP3 audio files from  
the memory card.  
Deleting an audio file removes it from all playlists it  
appears on.  
1 Access the audio player.  
Deleting an Audio File  
2 Scroll to Songs, Albums, Artists, or Genres.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete All Music.  
1 Access the audio player.  
2 Select the folder containing the audio file you  
want to delete.  
5 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
3 If the folder you selected contains more folders,  
within that folder, select the folder containing the  
audio file you want to delete.  
4 Scroll to the audio file you want to delete.  
5 Press m.  
6 Select Delete Song.  
46  
   
Audio Player  
Choosing a Theme  
The theme you choose controls the appearance of  
the audio player screens.  
DRM Items  
Some of the MP3 audio files on the memory card  
may be DRM items. When a DRM items has  
expired, you can no longer play it.  
1 Access the audio player.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Themes.  
If you scroll to an audio file that is expired and try to  
play it, a message saying you cannot play it  
appears. If you play a list containing an expired  
audio file, the audio player skips over the expired  
item and no message is displayed.  
A checkmark appears next to the theme that is  
in use.  
4 Select the theme you want.  
Setting Audio and Visual  
Options  
You can customize the sound of the audio player  
by setting the equalizer. You can customize the  
look of the audio player screen by choosing a  
theme or by viewing visuals while listening to an  
audio file.  
Viewing Visuals  
To view visuals on the display instead of the details  
of the song currently playing:  
1 While viewing the details of the audio file  
currently playing, press m.  
2 Select Turn On Visuals.  
To view the details of the song currently playing  
instead of visuals:  
Setting the Equalizer  
1 From anywhere in the audio player, press m.  
2 Select Equalizer.  
1 While viewing visuals press m.  
2 Select Turn Off Visuals.  
A checkmark appears next to the equalizer  
mode that is in use.  
3 Select the equalizer mode you want.  
47  
           
Receiving Call Alerts  
When you receive a call alert, you must answer,  
queue, or clear it. You cannot receive phone calls  
or BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls until you do.  
Call Alerts  
Sending a call alert lets the recipient know you  
want to talk to him or her on a BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie call.  
To answer a call alert:  
When you send a call alert, the recipient’s phone  
emits a series of beeps, or vibrates, and displays  
your name or BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number.  
Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button to make  
a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call to the sender.  
The recipient can:  
To queue a call alert:  
Press A under Queue.  
To clear a call alert:  
•
•
•
Answer — begin a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call  
with the sender  
Queue — store the call alert to the call alert  
queue, which is a list of call alerts  
Press O. -or-  
Press A under Clear. -or-  
If the flip is closed, press ..  
Clear — dismiss and delete the call alert  
Sending Call Alerts  
Note: The recent calls list also stores call alerts  
you have received. They appear as  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls. Call alerts  
remain in your recent calls list until you  
delete them or until they reach the end of  
the list.  
1 Enter the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number you  
want to send to, as you would when making a  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call.  
2 Press A under Alert. Ready to Alert appears  
on the display.  
3 Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button until  
Using the Call Alert Queue  
Alert Successful appears on the display.  
Note: If the alert is not successful, this may  
mean the person you are trying to reach is  
on a call or has the phone turned off.  
When you queue a call alert, it remains in the call  
alert queue until you make a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
call to the sender or delete it.  
48  
               
Call Alerts  
3 Press A under Alert. Ready to Alert appears  
Viewing Call Alerts  
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert.  
2 Scroll through the list.  
on the display.  
4 Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button until  
Alert Successful appears on the display.  
Viewing Date and Time  
To view the date and time a call alert was received:  
Deleting Call Alerts  
To delete a call alert from the queue:  
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert.  
2 Select the call alert you want information on.  
1 From the call alert queue, scroll to the call alert  
you want to delete.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Delete.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Responding to Call Alerts in the  
Queue  
After you queue a call alert, you can respond to it  
by making a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call to the  
sender or sending a call alert to the sender.  
To delete all call alerts from the queue:  
1 From the call alert queue, press m.  
Making a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie Call to the  
Sender  
2 From the call alert menu, select Delete All.  
3 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert.  
Sorting Call Alerts  
2 Scroll to the call alert you want to respond to.  
Tip: You must have at least one call alert in the  
3 Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button to begin  
queue to access this feature.  
the call.  
To sort call alerts by the order they were received:  
This removes the call alert from the queue.  
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Sort By.  
Sending a Call Alert to the Sender  
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert.  
2 Scroll to the call alert you want to respond to.  
4 Select First on Top or Last on Top.  
49  
       
Call alerts you have received appear as BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie calls. Like all items in the recent calls  
list, they remain listed until you delete them or until  
they reach the end of the list.  
Recent Calls  
The recent calls list displays information  
associated with calls you have made and received  
and call alerts you have received. It also displays  
My Info and contact information sent to you from  
other phones.  
For phone calls, an additional icon appears giving  
information about the call:  
A call you made.  
The recent calls list displays up to 20 items.  
X
A call you received.  
W
Calls and Call Alerts  
The recent calls list contains the numbers of up to  
20 of the most recent calls you have made and  
received.  
A missed call. Missed calls appear on the  
recent calls list only if you have Caller ID.  
V
When you select a call to view its details, you see  
information such as the name associated with the  
call, the number, date, time, and duration of the  
call.  
If the number of a recent call is stored in Contacts,  
the following information appears:  
•
•
The name assigned to the number  
The Contacts type icon associated with the  
number. If the Contacts entry containing the  
number has more than one number or address  
stored, <> surrounds the Contacts type icon. For  
information on Contacts types, see page 58.  
My Info From Other Phones  
The recent calls list displays My Info from other  
phones. See “Sending My Info and Contact  
Information” on page 140.  
The BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number Contacts type  
icon appears when you receive a BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie call or call alert, even if the number  
is not stored in Contacts.  
This icon j appears with My Info from other  
phones on the recent calls list, along with the  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number of the person who  
sent the information.  
50  
             
Recent Calls  
When you select My Info from other phones to view  
its details, you see all the information sent.  
The name or BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number of the  
person who sent the contact information appears  
as a separate item on the recent calls list, above  
the information sent. If one person sends you more  
than one item of contact information, all the items  
appear below the person’s name or BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number.  
If you receive My Info from the same phone more  
than once, only the most recently sent version  
appears in the recent calls list.  
Contact Information From  
Other Phones  
The recent calls list displays contact information  
sent from other phones. This information comes  
from the other phone’s Contacts list or recent calls  
list. See “Sending My Info and Contact Information”  
on page 140.  
When you select contact information to view its  
details, you see the name or BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
number of the person who sent the information and  
all the information in the item.  
If you receive contact information with the same  
name from the same phone more than once, only  
the most recently sent version appears in the  
recent calls list.  
This icon d appears with contact information on  
the recent calls list.  
Viewing the Recent Calls List  
With the Flip Open  
Contact information in the recent calls list displays:  
•
•
The name contained in the contact information  
1 From the main menu, select Recent Calls.  
2 Scroll through the list.  
The Contacts type icon associated with the  
number or address contained in the contact  
information. If the item contains more than one  
number or address stored, <> surrounds the  
Contacts type icon.  
To view the details of an item on the list:  
From the recent calls list, select the item you  
want information on.  
Tip: To view the details of more items, keep  
scrolling.  
51  
       
Storing Items to Contacts  
With the Flip Closed  
Tip: If the item you want to store is a call, Store  
does not appear if the number is already  
stored in Contacts.  
1 Press ..  
2 If you want to view the rest of the recent calls  
list, press the volume controls.  
3 To store the item as a new entry, select [New  
Contact]. -or-  
3 Press . to dismiss the recent calls list.  
To store the number to an existing entry, select  
the entry.  
Choosing Picture View or List View  
You can set your phone to show the picture  
associated with each item as you view the recent  
calls list or show the list without pictures.  
Note: Storing My Info or contact information  
from another phone to a Contacts entry  
that has a name assigned to it does not  
change the name of the Contacts entry.  
1 From the recent calls list, press m.  
2 Select Recent Calls View.  
3 Select List View to show the recent calls list  
without pictures. -or-  
4 If the item you want to store is a call, you must  
assign a Contacts type to the number:  
With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll  
left or right to display the Contacts type you want  
to assign the number.  
Select Picture View to show the picture  
associated with each entry.  
5 If you want to add more information to the entry,  
follow the applicable instructions in “Creating  
Entries” on page 59.  
Storing Items to Contacts  
1 From the recent calls list, scroll to or select the  
6 Press A under Save.  
item you want to store.  
2 Press A under Store. -or-  
Deleting Items  
If Store is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Store or Update Contacts.  
To delete an item from the recent calls list:  
1 From the recent calls list, scroll to or select the  
item you want to delete.  
52  
         
Recent Calls  
2 Press A under Delete. -or-  
•
If you scroll to contact information from  
another phone, you can make a call to any of  
the numbers in the contact information.  
If Delete is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Delete.  
3 To place the call now, go to step 4. -or-  
3 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Scroll left or right to display the Contacts type for  
the number you want to call.  
To delete all items on the recent calls list:  
1 From the recent calls list, press m.  
2 Select Delete All.  
3 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
4 To make a phone call, press s. -or-  
To make a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call, press the  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button.  
You can also make calls while viewing the details  
of an item on the recent calls list:  
Making Calls From the Recent  
Calls List  
1 From the recent calls list, select the item  
containing the number you want to call.  
With the Flip Open  
•
If you select a call or contact information from  
another phone, you can make a call to the  
number shown first on the details screen.  
1 From the main menu, select Recent Calls.  
2 Scroll to the item containing the number you  
want to call.  
•
If you scroll to My Info from another phone,  
you can make a call to the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number of the phone that sent  
the information.  
•
If you scroll to a call, you can make a call to  
the number that made the call. If the number  
is stored in Contacts, you can make a call to  
any of the numbers stored with it.  
2 To make a phone call, press s. -or-  
•
If you scroll to My Info from another phone,  
you can make a call to the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number of the phone that sent  
the information.  
To make a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call, press the  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button.  
With the Flip Closed  
1 Press . to display the most recent call.  
53  
     
Making Calls From the Recent Calls List  
2 Press the volume controls to scroll to the name  
or number you want to call.  
•
•
If you scroll to a call, you can make a call to  
the number that made the call.  
If you scroll to My Info from another phone,  
you can make a call to the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number of the phone that sent  
the information.  
•
If you scroll to contact information from  
another phone, you can make a call to the  
number currently displayed.  
3 To make a phone call, press t on the top of  
your phone. -or-  
To make a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call, press the  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button.  
54  
Using Word Mode  
Entering Text  
In Word mode, T9 Text Input analyzes the letters  
on the keypad button you press and arranges them  
to create words. As you type, T9 Text Input  
matches your keystrokes to words in its database  
and displays the most commonly used matching  
word. You can add you own words to this  
database.  
You can enter text, numbers, and symbols into  
your phone using Alpha, Word, Numeric, or  
Symbol text input modes.  
Alpha — Press a key several times for each  
l
j
character.  
Word — Press a key once for each letter  
while words likely to be the one you want are  
chosen from a database.  
Entering a Word  
1 Select Word as your text input mode.  
2 Type a word by pressing one key for each letter.  
Symbols — Enter punctuation and other  
i
k
symbols.  
For example, to type “test” press 8 37  
8.  
Numeric — Enter numbers.  
The displayed word may change as you type it.  
Do not try to correct the word as you go. Type to  
the end of the word before editing.  
When you access a screen that requires you to  
enter text, you start in the mode last used.  
3 If the word that appears is not the desired word,  
press 0 to change the word on the display to  
the next most likely word in the database.  
To choose a text input mode:  
1 At a screen that requires you to enter text, press  
m.  
2 Select the text input mode you want to use. A  
checkmark appears next to the current mode.  
Repeat until the desired word appears.  
If the desired word does not appear, you can add it  
to the database.  
55  
                 
Special Function Keys  
Adding Words to the Database  
Capitalization  
1 Select Alpha as your text input mode.  
2 Type the word using Alpha mode.  
3 Select Word as your text input mode.  
4 Press #.  
When you press and hold the # key, it acts as a  
3-way toggle. Press and hold # to make the next  
letter typed uppercase (shift), to make all  
subsequent letters typed uppercase (caps lock), or  
to go back to lowercase letters.  
The word you typed in Alpha text entry mode is  
now in the database.  
These icons appear in the top row of your display:  
Note: You cannot store alphanumeric  
Shift is on.  
mor X  
combinations, such as Y2K.  
Caps lock is on.  
nor W  
Choosing a Language  
When neither of these icons appear, letters typed  
are lowercase. Scrolling up after typing a letter  
makes that letter uppercase.  
To change the language of the database:  
1 At a screen that requires you to enter text, press  
m.  
2 Select Languages.  
3 Select the language you want for your database.  
Note: When creating a text message, you  
cannot capitalize by scrolling up.  
Your phone automatically makes the first letter of a  
sentence uppercase.  
Special Function Keys  
Some of the phone’s keys assume different  
functions while in Alpha or Word mode.  
Punctuation  
Spaces  
Press # for a space.  
56  
   
Entering Text  
Press 1 or 0 to insert punctuation. Continue to  
press the key to view the list of symbols available  
through that key. Pause to select the symbol you  
want.  
Note: Additional punctuation symbols are  
available in Symbols mode.  
57  
•
A Contacts type — Each number or address  
stored must be assigned a Contacts type:  
Contacts  
Contacts stores up to 600 numbers or addresses.  
Each Contacts entry can store several numbers or  
addresses.  
Mobile  
phone number  
A
B
Walkie-Talkie BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
Information stored in Contacts is saved on your  
SIM card.  
number  
Work1  
Work2  
Home  
Email  
Fax  
phone number  
phone number  
phone number  
email address  
phone number  
phone number  
IP address  
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
A Contacts entry contains:  
•
A name — A name is required if you are storing  
more than one number or address to the entry;  
otherwise, it is optional. Typically, this is the  
name of the person whose contact information is  
stored in the entry.  
•
A ringtone — This is the sound your phone  
makes when you receive phone calls or call  
alerts from any of the numbers stored in the  
entry. You can assign the ringtone from your list  
of ringtones. If you do not assign a ringtone, the  
entry is created with a default ringtone assigned.  
Pager  
IP  
Other  
phone number  
•
A picture — This picture appears on the display  
when you receive phone calls from any of the  
phone numbers stored in the entry. You can  
assign the picture from the pictures stored in the  
media center. If you do not assign a picture, the  
entry is created with no picture assigned.  
•
A number or address — Each Contacts entry  
must contain a number or address. This may be  
any type of phone number, BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number, email address, or IP  
address.  
58  
               
Contacts  
Note: You can store numbers up to 64 digits  
To cancel a Contacts entry at any time, press e  
long, but every 20 digits must be  
to return to the idle screen.  
separated by a pause or wait. See  
“Creating Pauses and Waits” on page 64.  
To create a Contacts entry:  
1 To access the entry details screen:  
Select Contacts > [New Contact]. -or-  
From the Contacts list, press m. Select New.  
2 If you want to assign a name to the entry:  
Select Name.  
•
•
A Speed Dial number — When you store a  
phone number, it is assigned a Speed Dial  
number. You can accept the default Speed Dial  
number or change it.  
A voice name — If you create a voice name for a  
number, you can then dial that number by saying  
the voice name into your phone. This icon P  
appears to the left of the Contacts type icon if a  
voice name is assigned.  
Enter the name. See “Entering Text” on page  
55. When you are finished, press O.  
Tip: Press A under Browse to select a name  
already in Contacts.  
Accessing Contacts  
3 If you want to assign a ringtone or picture to the  
entry, select [Ringtone/Picture]. See  
“Assigning a Ringtone or Picture” on page 60.  
From the main menu, select Contacts. -or-  
If you are on a call: Press m. Select Contacts.  
4 To assign a Contacts type to the number or  
address being stored:  
Creating Entries  
A number or address and a Contacts type are  
required for all Contacts entries. Other information  
is optional. You may enter the information in any  
order by scrolling through the entry details.  
Select the Contacts type field.  
Select the Contacts type you want to assign.  
5 To store a number or address:  
After you have entered the number or address,  
Contacts type, and any other information you want,  
you can press A under Save to save the entry to  
Contacts.  
Select the # field (or ID for an email address, or  
IP for an IP address).  
59  
                 
Creating Entries  
2 If you want to assign a ringtone:  
Enter the number or address. For phone  
numbers, use the 10-digit format. For email  
addresses, see “Entering Text” on page 55.  
With Ringer highlighted, scroll left or right to  
choose a ringtone from the list of ringtones. -or-  
Tip: Press A under Browse to select a number  
or address from Contacts, the recent calls  
list, or Memo.  
Select Ringer. Select the ringtone you want to  
assign from the ringtones available in the Media  
Center. If you want to assign a ring tone from the  
memory card, that ringtone must be a DRM  
item.  
When you are finished, press O.  
6 If you want to change the default Speed Dial  
number or a create a voice name for the entry,  
select [Options]. See “Assigning a Speed Dial  
Number or Voice Name” on page 60.  
7 If you want to add more numbers or addresses  
to the entry:  
3 If you want to assign a picture from the Media  
Center:  
Select Picture. Select the picture you want to  
assign.  
Some large pictures cannot be assigned.  
Scroll past the information you already entered.  
Tip: If an entry has a picture assigned and you  
want the entry to have no picture, select  
[No Picture] or press A under Unassign.  
Enter the additional information for the entry  
using step 3 through step 6. You must assign a  
name to the entry, if you have not already.  
4 When you are finished, press A under Back.  
5 When you are finished, press A under Back.  
8 Press A under Done.  
Assigning a Ringtone or Picture  
Assigning a Speed Dial Number or  
Voice Name  
1 If you have not already, select [Options].  
2 The default Speed Dial number assigned to a  
phone number is displayed in the Speed # field.  
This is always the next available Speed Dial  
location.  
Note: If you choose a picture or ringtone that is  
stored on the memory card, that picture or  
ringtone file is automatically moved to  
your phone’s memory.  
1 If you have not already, select  
[Ringtone/Picture].  
60  
       
Contacts  
If you want to assign the phone number to a  
different Speed Dial location:  
Viewing Entries  
When you view Contacts entries, you can choose  
how much detail you want to see.  
With the Speed # field highlighted, press O.  
Press A under Delete to delete the current  
Speed Dial number.  
Viewing the Contacts List  
Enter the new Speed Dial number using the  
keypad.  
In this view, each entry shows:  
•
•
The name assigned to the entry  
When you are finished, press O.  
A small version of the picture assigned to the  
entry, if you have set Contacts to show pictures  
in the Contacts list. See “Choosing Picture View  
or List View” on page 62.  
3 If you want to create a voice name for a phone  
number, select Voice Name.  
As directed by the screen prompts, say and  
repeat the name you want to assign to the  
number. Speak clearly into the microphone.  
•
The types of numbers and addresses stored in  
the entry  
To view entries from the Contacts list:  
4 When you are finished, press A under Back.  
1 Access Contacts.  
2 Scroll to view entries.  
Editing Entries  
1 From the Contacts list, scroll to or select the  
Tip: To find Contacts entries faster, use the  
entry you want to edit.  
keypad to enter the first letter of the name.  
2 Press A under Edit. -or-  
3 If an entry has more than one number or  
address stored, <> surrounds the Contacts type  
icon. Scroll left or right to view the icon for each  
number stored in the entry.  
If Edit is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Edit.  
The entry details screen displays.  
3 Follow the applicable instructions in “Creating  
Entries” on page 59 to edit the various fields.  
61  
         
Viewing Entries  
2 Select the number or address you want to view  
Selecting an Entry  
In this view, each entry shows:  
details of.  
If the you select a phone number, you can view  
its Speed Dial number and see whether it has a  
voice name.  
•
•
The name assigned to the entry  
A small version of the picture assigned to the  
entry  
To return to the entry, press A under Back or  
press O.  
•
•
The name of the ringtone assigned to the entry  
The numbers and addresses stored in the entry  
Viewing a Large Picture  
To select an entry:  
To view a large version of the picture assigned to  
an entry:  
1 From the Contacts list, select the entry you want  
to view.  
1 Select the entry.  
2 Scroll to view the numbers and addresses  
2 Select the first item shown on the entry screen.  
This item shows the name assigned to the entry  
or No Name.  
stored in the entry.  
Tip: To select other entries: Scroll left or right.  
Or, press # or *.  
Note: You cannot make calls from this view.  
To return to the Contacts list, press A under  
Back.  
To return to the entry, press A under Back or  
press O.  
Viewing More Details  
Choosing Picture View or List View  
When an entry is selected, you can view more  
details about the entry by selecting items within the  
entry.  
You can set Contacts to show the picture assigned  
to each entry as you view the Contacts list or show  
the Contacts list without pictures.  
Viewing Details of a Number or Address  
1 From the Contacts list, press m.  
2 Select Contacts View.  
1 Select the entry.  
62  
 
Contacts  
3 Select List View to show the Contacts list  
To set Contacts to show all entries:  
without pictures. -or-  
1 From the Contacts list, press m.  
2 Select Filter.  
3 Set this option to Show All.  
Select Picture View to show the picture  
assigned to each entry.  
Searching for a Name  
To search for a name in Contacts:  
Deleting Entries  
Delete an Entry  
1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry you  
want to delete.  
1 From the Contacts list, press A under Search.  
-or-  
If Search is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Search.  
2 Press m.  
3 To delete the entire entry, select Delete  
2 Enter the name you want to see. See “Entering  
Contact.  
Text” on page 55.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
3 Press O.  
Your phone finds the name you entered or the  
nearest match.  
Delete a Number or Address  
1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry that  
contains the number or address you want to  
delete.  
2 Scroll left or right to display the Contacts type for  
the number you want to delete. -or-  
Showing Only BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
Numbers  
To set Contacts to show only entries that contain  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie numbers:  
Select the entry. Scroll to or select the number  
you want to delete.  
1 From the Contacts list, press m.  
2 Select Filter.  
3 Set this option to Show WT.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete Number.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
63  
           
Checking Capacity  
Note: If an entry contains only one number or  
address, deleting the number or address  
deletes the entry.  
If you want a pause longer than 3 seconds, press  
and hold * more than once. Each P represents a  
3-second pause.  
To program a wait:  
Checking Capacity  
Press and hold * until the letter W appears.  
The W means your phone waits before dialing  
further.  
To see how many numbers are stored in Contacts:  
1 From the Contacts list, press m.  
If you store 17035551235W1234, when you select  
this number and make a call, your phone dials the  
first 11 digits and then waits. A message appears  
asking if you want to send the rest of the digits.  
Press A under Yes to dial the last 4 digits.  
2 Select Capacity.  
Creating Pauses and Waits  
When storing a number, you can program your  
phone to pause or wait between digits while  
dialing. A pause makes your phone pause for 3  
seconds before dialing further. A wait makes your  
phone wait for your response before dialing further.  
Tip: You can create pauses and waits while  
dialing a number from the keypad. See  
“Creating Pauses and Waits While Dialing”  
on page 70.  
This feature is useful when using voice mail or  
other automated phone systems that require you to  
dial a phone number and then enter an access  
number.  
International Numbers  
When storing a number that you plan to use for  
international calls, use Plus Dialing:  
To program a pause:  
1 Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A “0”  
appears, then changes to a “+”.  
Note: The network translates the “+” into the  
appropriate international access code  
needed to place the call.  
Press and hold * until the letter P appears.  
The P represents a 3-second pause.  
If you store 17035551235P1234, when you select  
this number and make a call, your phone dials the  
first 11 digits, pauses for 3 seconds, then dials the  
last 4 digits.  
64  
               
Contacts  
2 Enter the country code, city code or area code,  
If you are making a phone call:  
and phone number.  
•
Your phone places the call to the phone number  
assigned to the Contacts type displayed.  
For information about making international calls,  
see “Making International Calls” on page 70.  
•
If the Contacts type displayed is not a phone  
number, your phone places the call to the phone  
number stored in the Contacts entry.  
Making Calls From Contacts  
While Viewing the Contacts List  
1 Access Contacts.  
2 Scroll to the name or number you want to call.  
•
If the Contacts type displayed is not a phone  
number and you have more than one phone  
number stored in the Contacts entry, your phone  
prompts you to select the phone number you  
want to place the call to.  
Tip: To find Contacts entries faster, use the  
If you are making a phone call:  
keypad to enter the first letter of the name.  
•
Your phone places the call to the phone number  
assigned to the Contacts type displayed.  
If the Contacts type displayed is not a phone  
number, your phone places the call to the phone  
number stored in the Contacts entry.  
If the Contacts type displayed is not a phone  
number and you have more than one phone  
number stored in the Contacts entry, your phone  
prompts you to select the phone number you  
want to place the call to.  
3 To place the call now, go to step 4. -or-  
Scroll left or right to display the Contacts type for  
the number you want to call.  
•
4 To make a phone call, press s. -or-  
To make a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call, press the  
Boost Walkie-Talkie button.  
If you are making a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call,  
your phone places the call to the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number stored in the Contacts entry,  
even if the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie icon is not  
displayed.  
•
After Selecting an Entry  
1 Access Contacts.  
2 Select the Contacts entry that contains the  
number you want to call.  
65  
   
Making Calls From Contacts  
3 Scroll to or select number you want to call.  
4 To make a phone call, press s. -or-  
To make a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call, press the  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button.  
If you try to make a type of call that does not match  
the Contacts type of the number you chose, no call  
is placed.  
66  
To store the memo number to Contacts:  
Memo  
1 From the main menu, select Memo.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Store to Contacts.  
4 To store the number as a new entry, select [New  
Contact]. -or-  
Memo lets you store a number, make a call to that  
number, and save it to Contacts.  
To create a memo:  
1 From the main menu, select Memo.  
2 Enter the number using your keypad.  
3 Press O.  
To store the number to an existing entry, select  
the entry.  
5 With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll  
left or right to display the Contacts type you want  
to assign the number.  
6 If you want to add more information to the entry,  
follow the applicable instructions in “Creating  
Entries” on page 59.  
To view the memo later:  
From the main menu, select Memo.  
To delete the memo:  
1 From the main menu, select Memo.  
2 Press and hold A under Delete.  
3 Press O.  
7 Press A under Save.  
To edit the memo:  
1 From the main menu, select Memo.  
2 Enter the new number.  
3 Press O.  
To make a call to the memo number:  
1 From the main menu, select Memo.  
2 To make a phone call, press s. -or-  
To make a Boost Walkie-Talkie call, press the  
Boost Walkie-Talkie button.  
67  
               
Enter the number using your keypad. -or-  
Call Forwarding  
Press A under Search. Select Contacts,  
Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you  
want to enter.  
Call forwarding sends calls to the phone numbers  
you specify. You can forward all calls to one  
number or forward missed calls to different  
numbers depending on the reason you missed the  
call.  
4 Press O.  
All your calls are now forwarded to the number you  
specified.  
Forwarding All Calls  
When you set your phone to forward all calls, an  
icon appears in the top row of the display:  
Turning Off Call Forwarding  
If you do not want all your calls forwarded, turn the  
feature off:  
Phone line 1 is active; calls to phone line 1  
are being forwarded.  
G
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward > To.  
2 Set this option to Off.  
To forward all calls:  
All your calls are now sent to your phone.  
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward >  
Calls you miss are forwarded according to the  
options set for missed calls. By default, missed  
calls are forwarded to voice mail.  
Forward > All Calls.  
2 Select To.  
If you specified a forwarding number for all calls  
before, this number displays.  
Forwarding Missed Calls  
You can specify a forwarding number for each type  
of missed call:  
To forward calls to this number, press A under  
Back.  
•
If Busy — Your phone is on a call or transferring  
data.  
To delete this number, press O, then press and  
hold A under Delete.  
3 To enter the number you want to forward calls to:  
68  
                 
Call Forwarding  
•
•
If No Answer — You do not answer on the first  
Viewing Call Forwarding  
Settings  
4 rings.  
If Unreachable — Your phone is out of  
coverage or powered off.  
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward >  
Forward > All Calls.  
2 With To highlighted, press A under Status.  
To forward missed calls:  
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward >  
Forward > Detailed.  
2 Select If Busy to specify a forwarding number  
for calls received when your phone is busy.  
3 If you specified a forwarding number for this type  
of call before, this number displays.  
To forward calls to this number, press A under  
Back and go to step 6. -or-  
To delete this number, press O, then press and  
hold A under Delete.  
4 To enter the number you want to forward this  
type of call to:  
Enter the number using your keypad. -or-  
Press A under Search. Select Contacts,  
Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you  
want to enter.  
5 Press O.  
6 Repeat step 2 through step 5 for If No Answer  
and If Unreachable.  
7 When you are finished, press A under Back.  
69  
 
To create a wait while dialing a phone number:  
Advanced Calling  
Features  
1 From the keypad, enter the digits you want to  
occur before the wait.  
2 Press m.  
Putting a Call on Hold  
1 While on an active call, press m.  
3 Select Insert Wait.  
4 Enter the digits you want to occur after the wait.  
2 Select Hold.  
Making International Calls  
Your service default is “International Calls  
Restricted.” Contact BoostTM Customer Care to  
obtain international dialing access.  
If you want to make the call active again, press A  
under Resume.  
Creating Pauses and Waits  
While Dialing  
You can enter a pause or wait while dialing a  
number. For more information on pauses and  
waits, see “Creating Pauses and Waits” on page  
64.  
Calls placed between the United States and  
Canada do not require an international access  
code.  
Plus Dialing lets you place an international call to  
most countries without entering the local  
international access code.  
To create a pause while dialing a phone number:  
1 Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A “0”  
appears, then changes to a “+”.  
1 From the keypad, enter the digits you want to  
occur before the pause.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Insert Pause.  
Note: The network translates the “+” into the  
appropriate international access code  
needed to place the call.  
4 Enter the digits you want to occur after the  
pause.  
2 Enter the country code, city code or area code,  
and phone number.  
3 Press s.  
70  
                     
Advanced Calling Features  
One Touch BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie (WT)  
Press A under Search. Select Contacts,  
Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you  
want to enter.  
One Touch BoostTM Walkie-Talkie sets your phone  
to call the most recent BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
number on the recent calls list, or a BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number you choose, every time you  
press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button.  
3 Press O.  
Turning Off One Touch BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > WT  
Options > One Touch BoostTM Walkie-Talkie.  
Setting One Touch BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie  
To the Most Recent BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
Number  
2 Set this option to Off.  
3 Press O.  
Setting Flip Actions  
For Answering Calls  
To set your phone to answer calls when you open  
the flip:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > WT  
Options > One Touch BoostTM Walkie-Talkie.  
2 Set this option to Last Call.  
To Any BoostTM Walkie-Talkie Number  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > WT  
Options > One Touch BoostTM Walkie-Talkie >  
Assigned Number.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone  
Calls > Flip Activation > Flip to Ans.  
2 Set this option to On.  
2 To enter the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number you  
want your phone to call every time you press the  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button:  
To set your phone not to answer calls when you  
open the flip:  
Set Flip to Ans to Off in step 2.  
Enter the number using your keypad. -or-  
71  
           
Call Timers  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Phone Lifetime — displays the total minutes of  
For Ending Calls  
To set your phone to end calls when you close the  
flip:  
all your phone calls.  
WT Reset — keeps a running total of all of your  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie minutes, until you reset it.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone  
Calls > Flip Activation > Flip to End.  
2 Set this option to On.  
WT Lifetime — displays the total minutes of all  
your BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls.  
Circuit Reset — keeps a running total of all of  
your circuit data use, until you reset it.  
Circuit Lifetime — displays the total minutes of  
all of your circuit data use.  
Kbytes Reset — keeps a running total of the  
number of kilobytes sent and received by your  
phone, until you reset it.  
To set your phone not to end calls when you close  
the flip:  
Set Flip to End to Off in step 2.  
Note: If you are using your phone with a  
headset, and you have the Flip to End  
option set to On, closing your flip sends  
incoming sound to the headset and does  
not end the call.  
To view or reset a timer:  
1 From the main menu, select Call Timers.  
2 Select the feature you want to view or reset.  
3 To view a feature without resetting: Press O  
when you are finished viewing. -or-  
Call Timers  
Call timers measure the duration of your phone  
calls, BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls, and circuit data  
use, as well as the number of Kilobytes sent and  
received by your phone:  
To reset a feature: Press A under Reset.  
Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
•
Last Call — displays the duration of your most  
Note: The values displayed by Call Timers  
should not be used for billing. Call timers  
are estimates only.  
recent phone call.  
•
Phone Reset — keeps a running total of your  
phone call minutes, until you reset it.  
72  
     
Advanced Calling Features  
2 With the phone’s display facing up, insert the  
data cable’s connector into the accessory  
connector, until you hear a click.  
Using Your Phone as a Modem  
To use your phone as a modem with a laptop,  
handheld device, or desktop computer:  
1 Open the connector cover.  
connector  
cover  
3 Insert the data plug into the data port of the other  
device.  
When used as a modem, your phone has these  
data transfer modes:  
•
Circuit data — used for sending and receiving  
faxes and for transferring large files  
•
Packet data — used for small file transfers such  
as email  
73  
             
Making TTY Calls  
TTY device features such as Turbo-Code,  
High-Speed, and Interruption are not supported by  
your phone. These features must be turned off or  
disabled to use your TTY device with your phone.  
To use these services, you must install the iDEN  
Wireless Data Services software (available  
separately) and subscribe to a BoostTM Wireless  
Web access plan. For more information on setting  
up your computer and your i875 phone for packet  
and circuit data calls, go to www.boostmobile.com.  
Turning On the TTY Feature  
Your phone’s TTY feature must be on if you want  
to make TTY calls, set the TTY mode, or change  
the TTY baud rate. To make sure the TTY feature  
is on:  
Making TTY Calls  
To use your phone to make phone calls using a  
teletypewriter (TTY) device:  
From the main menu, select Settings > Phone  
1 Connect one end of a 2.5mm cable into the  
audio jack on your phone. Connect the other  
end of the cable to your TTY device.  
2 Make sure that your phone’s TTY feature is on  
and select the TTY mode you want to use.  
Calls > TTY > Use TTY. This field must say On.  
Choosing a Mode  
Your phone supports these TTY modes:  
3 Use your phone to enter phone numbers and  
•
•
•
TTY — You type and read text on your TTY  
make calls.  
device.  
When you make a TTY call, these icons appear on  
the phone’s display:  
VCO (Voice-Carry-Over) — You speak into your  
phone and read text replies on your TTY device.  
HCO (Hearing-Carry-Over) — You type text on  
your TTY device and listen to voice replies on  
your phone speaker.  
Phone call is active.  
N
Phone call is on hold.  
O
To change mode while not in a call:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone  
Calls > TTY > Type.  
2 Select the TTY mode you want.  
74  
         
Advanced Calling Features  
When you make a TTY call, the call begins in the  
TTY mode you last selected.  
To change the TTY baud rate:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone  
Calls > TTY > Baud.  
To change mode during a call using your phone:  
2 Select the baud rate for your location.  
Special Dialing Codes  
Call Restrictions  
You can prevent your phone from making or  
receiving long distance, incoming, and outgoing  
(except 911) calls.  
1 Press m.  
2 Select In Call Setup > TTY > Type.  
3 Select the mode you want.  
To change mode during a call using your TTY  
device, issue one of the following commands:  
•
•
•
“VCO please” — to select VCO mode  
“HCO please” — to select HCO mode  
“HCO off please” — to turn off HCO mode  
Contact BoostTM Customer Care for more  
information.  
Important: When you are using HCO, the sound  
coming from your phone speaker may  
be uncomfortably loud. Use caution  
when putting the phone to your ear.  
(For information on setting the volume  
of your phone speaker, see “Setting the  
Volume” on page 179.)  
Telecommunications Relay Service  
BoostTM supports services for communicating with  
speech and/or hearing impaired individuals. You  
can dial 711 to reach a local Telecommunications  
Relay Center. You will then be connected to your  
destination number. Relay service works through a  
Communications Assistant who reads messages  
typed into a TDD/TTY device by a speech or  
hearing impaired individual to you. The  
Changing the TTY Baud Rate  
By default, your phone’s TTY baud rate is set to  
45.45, the baud rate required for TTY calls within  
the U.S. To make calls outside the U.S., set your  
TTY baud rate to 50.00.  
Communications Assistant then types your spoken  
messages to the hearing or speech impaired  
individual. Telecommunications Relay Service is  
available 24 hours a day, seven days a week, and  
every call is strictly confidential.  
75  
         
Additional Calling Features  
Note: Using 711 to reach Telecommunications  
Relay Service may not be available in all  
areas.  
Per-Line Blocking  
You can permanently block delivery of your phone  
number on every call you make.  
Additional Calling Features  
To disable on a per-call basis:  
Contact BoostTM Customer Care to obtain these  
services or for additional information:  
Press * 8 2 before dialing the call.  
Call Restrictions  
You can prevent your phone from making or  
receiving long distance, incoming, and outgoing  
(except 911) calls.  
Note: Some services are not available outside  
of the continental United States.  
Caller ID  
BoostTM 411  
Your phone can automatically display the phone  
number or name (if the 10-digit phone number is  
stored in your Contacts) of the person calling  
(unless blocked by the caller), enabling you to  
decide whether to take the call or forward it to voice  
mail.  
The Directory that puts you straight through —  
Now there is no need to make 2 calls, memorize a  
number, or hunt for a pen to write a number down.  
BoostTM 411 is your mobile directory service that  
connects you straight through to the number you  
want.  
Caller ID information is not available on all calls.  
Per-Call Blocking  
You can block delivery of your phone number to  
other Caller ID units for a single phone call:  
White Page Listings  
You can request a telephone number for any  
person, business, or government agency in the  
continental United States and Hawaii. Operators  
can also provide address information if available.  
Press * 6 7 before dialing the call.  
YourBoostTM phone number cannot be blocked  
from calls made to 911, 800, 855, 866, 877, 888, or  
other toll- free phone numbers.  
76  
       
Advanced Calling Features  
Yellow Page Listings  
Movie Listings and Show Times  
You can ask the operator to perform a search by  
category if the specific business name is unknown.  
For example, you can request information for a surf  
shop near your home or school.  
BoostTM 411 operators have access to movie  
listings at most theaters in the continental United  
States and Hawaii. You only need to ask for a  
specific movie or movie theater to get current  
movies, locations or show times. Additional  
information such as running time, synopsis, and  
ratings are also available. Show times and listings  
are available 24-48 hours in advance.  
Nationwide Call Completion  
BoostTM 411 operators can connect you to any  
listing in the continental United States and Hawaii.  
If requested, the operator will stay on the line while  
connecting to the number.  
Local Event Information  
You can request information on local events such  
as sporting events, concerts, state and county fairs  
and other current events. BoostTM 411 operators  
can provide dates, times, and locations for these  
events.  
Driving Directions  
BoostTM 411 operators are able to provide  
directions to reach a specific destination.  
Operators will work with you to determine your  
starting point and provide clear directions to the  
destination.  
Restaurant Reservations  
BoostTM 411 operators can assist in finding a  
restaurant and then coordinate reservations. A  
BoostTM 411 operator will confirm your reservation  
information through a return phone call. For your  
convenience, the reservation will be in your name.  
Note: Reservation service may not be available  
for all restaurants.  
77  
 
If you dismiss the notification, the message is not  
deleted. It can be accessed through the message  
center.  
Messages  
To access your voice mail messages, text and  
numeric messages, Web alerts, and any other  
types of messages you are able to receive, go to  
the message center:  
If you are not on a phone call when you receive a  
message, your phone sounds a notification tone  
every 30 seconds until you access the message or  
dismiss the alert.  
1 Press A under Mesg. -or-  
If you are on a call when you receive a message,  
your phone may sound a notification tone during  
the call or after you end the call, depending on how  
you set your notification options.  
From the main menu, select Messages.  
2 Scroll to the type of message you want to  
access.  
3 Press A under the display option on the left.  
Setting Notification Options  
To control whether your phone sounds message  
notification tones while you are on phone calls:  
The message center shows how many messages  
you have of each type. You can listen to, read, or  
delete these messages.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone  
Note: In order for you to access voice mail  
through the message center, there must  
already be a message in your voice mail  
box. If there is no message, you must  
access voice mail by dialing into your  
voice mail box using your PTN.  
Calls > Notifications.  
2 Select the option you want:  
•
Receive All — Tones sound during calls for  
all types of messages.  
•
Message Mail Only — Tones sound during  
calls for mail messages; tones for all other  
types of messages are held until you end  
calls.  
Message Notifications  
When you receive a message, your phone notifies  
you with text on the display and a notification tone  
or vibration. You can access the message or  
dismiss the notification.  
•
Delay All — Tones for all types of messages  
are held until you end calls.  
Note: Delay All is the default setting.  
78  
         
Messages  
3 Press A under Select.  
If the caller leaves a message, this icon y  
appears on the display, reminding you that you  
have a new message.  
Tip: To set notification options during a call:  
Press m. Select In Call Setup >  
Notifications.  
BoostTM Text and Numeric  
Messages  
Your i875 refers to Text Messages as Web Alerts.  
With BoostTM Text Messaging, you can:  
Voice Mail  
When you receive a voice mail message, New  
Voice Mail Message appears on the display.  
Press A under Call.  
•
•
•
Send and receive messages (up to 500  
characters in length) with preset replies and  
respond to them at the touch of a button.  
Send messages to one individual from your  
phone or contact several at once from any email  
system or boostmobile.com.  
To dismiss the message notification:  
If the flip is closed, press .. -or-  
If the flip is open, press O or press A under  
Back, or close the flip.  
This icon yappears on the display, reminding  
you that you have a new message.  
Respond to messages when you’re at a movie  
or in a noisy location.  
Sending Unanswered Calls to Voice  
Mail  
For additional information on how to use this  
service, visit www.boostmobile.com.  
To send a phone call to voice mail instead of  
answering it:  
Sending a Text Message  
BoostTM Text Messaging provides 2 choices for  
sending messages: Web Messaging or Email  
Messaging.  
If the flip is closed, press .. -or-  
Press e. -or-  
Press A under No.  
79  
             
BoostTM Text and Numeric Messages  
Web Messaging on BoostMobile.com  
These messages can be up to 140 letters or 20  
digits long. You can store up to 16 of these  
messages. Each message is stamped with the  
date and time it was left.  
BoostTM Web Messaging enables you to send a  
message to yourself, someone else, or a group of  
Boost Mobile customers.  
If your phone is powered off when you receive a  
message, your phone notifies you the next time  
you power it on. If you are out of your coverage  
area, your phone alerts you when you return to  
your coverage area.  
For more information or to send a Web message,  
go to www.boostmobile.com and click on Send a  
Message.  
Email Messaging  
From any email account, type the 10-digit phone  
number of a BoostTM customer in the To field and  
add @myboostmobile.com (for example,  
[email protected]). The entire  
message can be up to 500 characters.  
Your phone attempts to deliver these messages for  
up to 7 days.  
Tip: While reading a text and numeric message  
that contains a phone number, you can  
press s to call that number.  
Sending a Numeric Message  
Receiving a Message  
When you receive a text and numeric message,  
this icon wappears on the display.  
BoostTM Numeric messaging is available through  
BoostTM Voice Mail. These messages can be  
displayed directly on your i875. To leave a numeric  
message:  
To view the message:  
•
The caller must press “1” during your Voice Mail  
greeting.  
Once the caller presses “1” only numeric  
messages can be sent.  
1 Press A under Read.  
2 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll  
to read it.  
3 To keep the message, press A under Save.  
-or-  
•
The phone’s display refers to text and numeric  
messages as Text Messages.  
To delete the message, press A under Delete.  
80  
     
Messages  
To dismiss the message notification:  
Note: Your phone's SMS address is your  
[email protected]. Example:  
[email protected]. Your  
phone's Text Messaging address is your  
[email protected].  
If the flip is closed, press .. -or-  
If the flip is open, press A under Back or close  
the flip.  
This icon wappears on the display, reminding  
you that you have a new message.  
When you receive a Web alert, a notification  
appears on the display.  
If you dismiss the notification, this icon w  
appears on the display, reminding you that you  
have a new message.  
Reading from the Message Center  
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text  
Msgs.  
Deleting Web Alerts  
2 Select the message you want to read.  
3 Press A under Read.  
1 From the message center, select Web Alert.  
4 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll  
2 Press A under Goto.  
3 Scroll to the message you want to delete.  
4 Press m.  
to read it.  
5 To keep the message, press O. -or-  
To delete the message, scroll to the end of the  
message, then press A under Delete.  
5 Select Delete.  
6 Press A under Yes to confirm.  
Web Alerts  
Web alerts are text and numeric messages sent  
from:  
•
•
•
•
Your i875 phone  
www.boostmobile.com  
Any email application  
81  
     
Setting Your Phone to Vibrate  
You can set your phone to vibrate instead of  
making a sound when you receive all phone calls,  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls, call alerts, message  
notifications, and Datebook reminders.  
Ringtones  
To set the ringtone your phone makes when you  
receive phone calls, call alerts, message  
notifications, or Datebook reminders:  
1 From the main menu, select Ringtones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Scroll through the list of ringtones and select the  
one you want to assign. Vibrate sets your phone  
to vibrate instead of making a sound; Silent sets  
your phone to neither vibrate nor make a sound.  
1 From the main menu, select Ringtones >  
VibeAll.  
2 Set this option to On.  
Tip: Pressing the volume controls to turn down  
the volume as far as possible sets VibeAll  
to On.  
Tip: Highlight a ringtone to hear it.  
To set your phone to vibrate instead of making a  
sound for some features but not others:  
4 Select the features you want to assigned the  
ringtone to.  
Tip: A checkmark next to a feature means the  
current ringtone has been assign to it. To  
remove the assignment, select the feature.  
1 From the main menu, select Ringtones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Select Vibrate from the list of ringtones.  
4 Select the features you want to set to make no  
5 When you are finished, press A under Done.  
sound.  
Note: This icon Mappears on the display if you  
set your phone to neither vibrate nor make  
a sound for phone calls.  
5 When you are finished, press A under Done.  
Note: To set ring options for BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie calls, see “Setting Your  
Phone to Vibrate” on page 179.  
82  
           
Ringtones  
These icons indicate how the ringer is set.  
4 Select A Contact.  
5 Select the Contacts entry you want to assign the  
Q
R
u
The phone always vibrates instead of making  
a sound.  
ringtone to.  
Ring and Vibrate  
To set your phone to ring and vibrate when you  
receive phone calls or call alerts:  
The phone vibrates instead of making a  
sound for phone calls.  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls are heard  
through the earpiece, not the speaker.  
1 From the main menu, select Ringtones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Scroll through the list of ringtones and highlight  
the one you want to assign.  
4 Press m.  
5 Select Assign w/Vibe.  
6 Select the features you want to set to ring and  
vibrate.  
These icons may appear at the same time.  
Assigning Ringtones to  
Contacts  
You can set the ringtone your phone makes when  
you receive phone calls or call alerts from  
someone you have stored in Contacts.  
7 When you are finished, press A under Done.  
Note: If you choose a ringtone that is stored on  
the memory card, that ringtone file is  
automatically moved to your phone’s  
memory. If you want to assign a ringtone  
from the memory card, that ringtone must  
be a DRM item.  
This icon Sappears on the display.  
Viewing Ringtone  
Assignments  
1 From the main menu, select Ringtones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Highlight any ringtone.  
1 From the main menu, select Ringtones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Scroll through the list of ringtones and select the  
one you want to assign.  
4 Press m.  
83  
         
Downloading More Ringtones  
5 Select Overview.  
6 Scroll to view ringtones assigned to features and  
Contact entries.  
Managing Memory  
To view the amount of memory available for  
custom ringtones:  
Downloading More Ringtones  
1 From the main menu, select Ringtones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Highlight any ringtone.  
4 Press m.  
5 Select Memory Usage.  
If you want to use other ringtones you can  
download them into your phone for a fee. Check  
the Downloads menu option on your phone for a  
catalog of additional items available for purchase  
and download directly from your phone. You can  
also go to www.boostmobile.com for a wide  
selection of available ringtones, including MP3  
files, and downloading instructions.  
Deleting custom ringtones frees memory.  
Note: Ringtones are stored in your phone using  
the same memory space used to store  
messages, voice records, Java  
Note: Ringtones purchased from this web site  
may be downloaded only once. If you  
delete a ringtone from your phone, you  
must purchase it again to download it  
again.  
applications data, pictures, and wallpaper  
images. Deleting some of these other  
items frees memory for ringtones.  
Deleting Custom Ringtones  
Deleting a ringtone from the list of ringtones  
deletes it from all parts of your phone, including the  
media center and Contacts.  
About DRM Ringtones  
Your phone supports gifting and Tell-A-Friend  
services for DRM ringtones. However, these  
services may not be offered by Boost Mobile®.  
Please contact Boost Mobile® for more information  
about these services.  
For more information about DRM items, see  
“Digital Rights Management” on page 160.  
84  
             
Ringtones  
Except for DRM ringtones, if you delete a ringtone  
that you purchased from your phone, you will have  
to purchase it again. Under certain conditions,  
some DRM vendors will not charge you if you  
download an item multiple times within a given time  
frame. Please contact the DRM vendor to learn  
more about their download regulations.  
To delete a custom ringtone:  
1 From the main menu, select Ringtones.  
2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off.  
3 Scroll to the ringtone you want to delete.  
4 Press m.  
5 Select Delete.  
6 Press A under Yes to confirm.  
85  
   
To go to the next page:  
Multi-Media Messages  
Scroll right. -or-  
Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you  
send and receive messages that may include text,  
pictures, videos, and audio recordings. You can  
send and receive these messages from your  
phone, through any email account, and from  
www.boostmobile.com.  
Press #. -or-  
Scroll to the end of the page and select MORE.  
To go to the previous page:  
Scroll left. -or-  
Your phone's MMS address is your  
[email protected]. Your PTN is your  
Boost Mobile 10-digit Personal Telephone  
Number.  
Press *.  
To open a message on the current page:  
Select the message you want to open. -or-  
Press the number on the keypad corresponding  
to the number of the message.  
Navigating the Inbox, Drafts,  
and Sent Items  
You can access MMS messages through the  
following options in the message center:  
Creating and Sending  
Messages  
Each message you create may contain the  
following fields:  
•
•
Inbox — MMS messages you have received  
Drafts — MMS messages you have created and  
saved but not sent  
•
To — the phone numbers or email addresses of  
one or more recipients  
Message — the body of the message. This may  
include text, pictures, videos, or audio  
recordings.  
•
Sent Items — MMS messages you have  
created and sent  
•
The messages in the Inbox, Drafts, and Sent Items  
are grouped in pages of 9 messages. Scroll to view  
the messages on a page.  
•
Subject — the subject line  
86  
                     
Multi-Media Messages  
•
Attach — one or more attachments. These may  
be pictures, videos, and audio recordings,  
including pictures, videos, and voice records you  
create while creating the message.  
Message Size  
You can create and send messages of up to 100  
KB, including attachments.  
To see the size of a message you are creating:  
•
•
•
•
Cc — the phone numbers or email addresses of  
more recipients  
1 Scroll to any field in the message.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Message Size.  
Priority — sets the priority of the message to  
normal or high.  
Report — lets you receive a report confirming  
that your message was delivered.  
Valid Until — sets a date after which no more  
attempts are made to deliver the message.  
Sending or Canceling  
To send the message at any time after it has been  
addressed:  
To send a message, you must address it to at least  
one recipient. All other message fields are optional.  
Press A under Send. -or-  
If Send is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Send.  
You can fill in the message fields in any order.  
To cancel the message at any time:  
Entering Text  
In message fields that require you to enter text, you  
can begin entering the text from the keypad when  
the field is highlighted.  
At the message screen, press A under Cancel.  
-or-  
Press e to cancel the message and save it in  
Drafts.  
While entering text, you can always choose a text  
input mode from the context-sensitive menu.  
For information on ways to enter text from the  
keypad, see “Entering Text” on page 55.  
87  
Creating and Sending Messages  
When you are finished addressing the message,  
Creating a Message  
1 To begin creating a message:  
press A under Back.  
3 To enter or edit the body of the message:  
From the main menu, select Messages >  
[Create Mesg]. -or-  
Select Message.  
Note: If you have created a signature, the  
signature automatically appears in this  
field. Text you enter appears before your  
signature. See “Customizing MMS” on  
page 104.  
Select [Create Mesg] from Inbox, Drafts, or  
Sent Items. -or-  
Begin creating a message from Contacts, the  
recent calls list, or the idle screen. See “More  
Ways to Begin a Message” on page 91. -or-  
Enter text from the keypad. -or-  
Reply to a received message. See “Replying to  
a Message” on page 90.  
Use a Quick Note. See “Quick Notes” on page  
93. -or-  
2 To address the message:  
Insert a picture, video, or audio recording. See  
“Attaching Pictures, Video, and Audio  
Recordings From the Media Center” on page 94.  
Select To.  
Enter the phone number or email address from  
the keypad and press O. Repeat this action to  
enter more phone numbers or email addresses.  
-or-  
When you are finished, press O.  
4 If you want to send the message now, press A  
under Send. -or-  
Select recipients from Contacts or the recent  
calls list. See “More Ways to Address a  
Message” on page 92.  
If Send is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Send. -or-  
To fill in more message fields, see “Adding More  
Message Options” on page 89.  
Tip: To remove a phone number or email  
address from the list of message recipients,  
scroll to the phone number or email  
address and press A under Remove.  
88  
Multi-Media Messages  
Enter the phone number or email address from  
the keypad and press O. Repeat this action to  
enter more phone numbers or email addresses.  
-or-  
Adding More Message Options  
1 To view more message fields in a message you  
are creating, select MORE. -or-  
Press A under More.  
Select recipients from Contacts or the recent  
calls list. See “More Ways to Address a  
Message” on page 92.  
2 If you want to create or edit the subject line:  
Select Subject.  
When you are finished addressing the message,  
press A under Back.  
Enter text from the keypad. -or-  
Select a Quick Note. See “Quick Notes” on page  
93.  
5 If you want to set the priority of the message:  
Select Priority.  
When you are finished, press O.  
Select the priority you want.  
3 If you want to attach a picture, video, or audio  
recording from the Media Center, see “Attaching  
Pictures, Video, and Audio Recordings From the  
Media Center” on page 94. If you want to create  
a voice record and attach it, see “Attaching New  
Pictures, Videos, and Voice Records” on page  
95.  
6 If you want to receive a report confirming that  
your message was delivered:  
Select Report > On Delivery.  
7 If you want to set a date after which attempts to  
deliver the message end:  
4 If you want to add more recipients in addition to  
Select Valid Until.  
those in the To field:  
Select a date by scrolling or entering numbers.  
Press O. -or-  
Select Cc.  
To set no date, press A under No Date.  
89  
Creating and Sending Messages  
8 To send the message, press A under Send.  
-or-  
•
Cc — If you are sending a reply to all, some  
recipients may be in this field.  
If Send is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Send.  
To reply to a message:  
1 View the message you want to reply to. -or-  
Replying to a Message  
If you have already viewed the message, scroll  
to it.  
You can reply to a received message while you are  
viewing it. If you have already viewed a message,  
you can also reply to it while it is highlighted in the  
message center. You cannot reply to unread  
messages.  
2 To reply to the sender only, press A under  
Reply. -or-  
To reply to the sender and all recipients: Press  
m. Select Reply All.  
For information on viewing received messages,  
see “Receiving a Message” on page 98 and  
“Viewing Received Messages From the Message  
Center” on page 100.  
3 A list of short phrases is displayed. Select any of  
these phrases to add it to the body of your  
messages. -or-  
Select [Create Reply] to begin the body of your  
message without using any of these phrases.  
When you reply to a message you received, some  
of the fields in your reply message are filled in  
automatically:  
4 Edit any message fields you want to change.  
5 Send the message.  
•
To — the phone number or email address of the  
sender of the message you are replying to. If  
you are sending a reply to all, some recipients  
may be in this field.  
Tip: To create new reply phrases to use in later  
reply message, see “Customizing MMS” on  
page 104.  
•
•
Message — the first 40 characters of the  
message you are replying to. Text you add to the  
body of your message appears above this.  
Subject — “Re:” followed by the subject line of  
the message you are replying to, if any.  
90  
Multi-Media Messages  
3 Press A under Create. -or-  
More Ways to Begin a Message  
If Create is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Create.  
In addition to beginning a message from the  
message center, you can begin a message from  
Contacts, the recent calls list, the idle screen, or  
the Media Center.  
4 Create and send the message. The message is  
automatically addressed to the phone number  
you chose.  
From Contacts  
From the Idle Screen  
1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry  
containing the phone number or email address  
you want to send the message to.  
1 Using the keypad, enter the number you want to  
send a message to.  
2 Scroll left or right to view the Contacts types until  
you see the icon for the phone number or email  
address you want to send a message to.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Create. The message is automatically  
addressed to the phone number you chose.  
3 Press A under Create. -or-  
From the Camera  
If Create is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Create Message.  
You can send pictures you have taken or videos  
you have recorded with your handset’s camera.  
4 Create and send the message. The message is  
automatically addressed to the phone number or  
email address you chose.  
1 After you have captured a picture or recorded a  
video, press A under Send.  
2 Create and send the message. The picture or  
video is automatically included as an  
attachment.  
From the Recent Calls List  
1 From the recent calls list, scroll to the entry you  
want to send a message to.  
2 If the entry has more than one phone number  
stored, view the phone number you want to send  
the message to.  
For information on taking pictures or recording  
videos, see “Camera” on page 118.  
91  
       
Creating and Sending Messages  
From the Media Center  
From Contacts  
You can send pictures and audio recordings in  
MMS messages.  
When you select recipients from Contacts,  
Contacts entries containing phone numbers or  
email addresses are displayed.  
1 From the media center, scroll to or select the  
item you want to include in a message.  
2 Press A under Send. If you scroll to or select  
an item that cannot be sent in an MMS  
message, Send is not one of your options.  
3 Create and send the message. The item you  
selected is automatically included as an  
attachment.  
You can search for an entry name as you would  
otherwise when viewing Contacts. See “Searching  
for a Name” on page 63.  
1 While you are creating a message, scroll to or  
select To or Cc.  
2 Press A under Contcs. -or-  
If Contcs is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Contacts.  
Note: Forward locked items cannot be sent in a  
message.  
3 Select the entry containing the phone number or  
email address you want to send the message to.  
4 If the entry contains more than one phone  
number or email address, select the ones you  
want to send the message to.  
More Ways to Address a Message  
When you are filling in the To and Cc message  
fields, you can select recipients from Contacts and  
the recent calls list.  
When you are finished selecting items within the  
You can select more than one recipient from  
Contacts and the recent calls list. A checkmark  
appears next to each selected item.  
entry, press A under Done.  
5 When you are finished selecting entries, press  
A under Done.  
Tip: To deselect a selected item: Scroll to a  
selected item and press O.  
From the Recent Calls List  
When you select recipients from the recent calls  
list, phone calls are displayed.  
92  
     
Multi-Media Messages  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls are displayed only if  
the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number is stored in  
Contacts and its Contacts entry also contains a  
phone number or email address.  
2 Press A under QNotes. -or-  
If QNotes is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select Insert Quick Notes.  
3 Select the Quick Note you want to insert into the  
message.  
Tip: To create new Quick Notes to use in later  
messages, see “Customizing MMS” on  
page 104.  
1 While you are creating a message, scroll to or  
select To or Cc.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Recent Calls.  
4 Select the entry containing the phone number or  
email address you want to send the message to.  
5 If the entry contains more than one phone  
number or email address, select the ones you  
want to send the message to.  
Inserting Pictures, Videos, and Audio  
Recordings From the Media Center  
When you are filling in the Message field, you can  
insert pictures, videos, and audio recordings from  
the Media Center into the body of the message.  
When you are finished selecting items within the  
entry, press A under Done.  
You can insert more than one of these items into a  
message. You can include text in the body of your  
message in addition to these items.  
6 When you are finished selecting entries, press  
A under Done.  
Note: For information on how items inserted into  
the body of a message appear when a  
message is received, see “Embedded  
Objects and Attachments” on page 99.  
Quick Notes  
When you are filling in the Message and Subject  
message fields, you can add ready-made words or  
short phrases called Quick Notes. After you add  
these words or phrases, you can edit them as you  
would any other text.  
Inserting Items  
1 While you are filling in the Message field, press  
m.  
2 Select Insert Picture, Insert Video, or Insert  
Audio.  
1 While you are creating a message, scroll to or  
select Message or Subject.  
93  
   
Creating and Sending Messages  
Attaching Items  
A list of pictures, videos, and audio recordings  
that can be included in a message appears.  
1 While you are creating a message, select  
Attach > [New Attachment].  
2 Select Browse Pictures, Browse Video, or  
Browse Audio.  
3 Select the picture, video, or audio recording you  
want to insert.  
Tip: To view or listen to the item before inserting  
it, highlight it and press A under Preview.  
A list of pictures, videos, and audio recordings  
that can be included in a message appears.  
Removing an Inserted Item  
3 Select the picture, video, or audio recording you  
want to attach.  
To remove an item inserted into the body of the  
message you are creating:  
Tip: To view or listen to the item before attaching  
1 Highlight the item you want to remove.  
2 Press A under Delete.  
it, highlight it and press A under Preview.  
4 If you want to attach more items, select [New  
Attachment].  
5 When you are finished, press A under Done.  
Attaching Pictures, Video, and Audio  
Recordings From the Media Center  
You can attach one or more pictures, videos, and  
audio recordings from the Media Center.  
Accessing the Camera  
While you are creating a message, you can access  
the camera to take new pictures and videos and  
attach them to the message.  
Video attachments must be 90KB or less.  
Note: For information on how attachments  
appear when a message is received, see  
“Embedded Objects and Attachments” on  
page 99.  
To access the camera:  
Press c.  
For information about taking pictures, see “Taking  
Pictures” on page 118.  
94  
 
Multi-Media Messages  
7 When you are finished, press A under Done if  
Attaching New Pictures, Videos, and  
Voice Records  
While you are creating a message, you can take  
pictures, record videos, or create voice records  
and attach them to the message.  
Done is one of your options.  
The picture is attached to the message and saved  
to the default storage location.  
Recording Video  
Taking a New Picture  
1 While you are creating a message, scroll to any  
message field and press m. -or-  
1 While you are creating a message, scroll to any  
message field and press m. -or-  
Select Attach > [New Attachment].  
Select Attach > [New Attachment].  
2 Select Record Video. This accesses the video  
recorder.  
2 Select Capture Picture. This accesses the  
camera.  
3 If you want to adjust lighting:  
3 If you want to adjust the zoom, lighting, picture  
quality, picture size, or a timer, set these options.  
See “Setting Picture Options” on page 119.  
4 Aim the camera lens on the flip. Use the internal  
display as the viewfinder.  
5 When the image you want to capture is in view,  
press and release O or press and release A  
under Capture.  
6 When the you have captured the picture you  
want to attach to your message, press and  
release O or press and release A under Save.  
-or-  
Press m.  
Select Spotlighting.  
Select On or Off.  
4 Aim the camera lens on the flip. Use the internal  
display as the viewfinder.  
5 If you want to zoom in or out, scroll up or down.  
If you want to change the image size, scroll left  
or right.  
6 When you are ready to record, press and  
release c, press and release O, or press and  
release A under Record. Releasing the key  
starts the recording.  
To discard the picture, press A under Discard.  
You can then take another picture.  
7 If you want to end the video, press c or press  
A under Stop.  
95  
 
Drafts  
8 To save the video, press c or press O. -or-  
Removing an Attachment  
To remove an attachment in a message you are  
creating:  
To view the video without saving it, press A  
under Review. -or-  
To discard the video without saving it, press A  
under Discard.  
1 While you are creating a message, select  
Attach.  
The picture is attached to the message and saved  
to the default storage location.  
2 Scroll to the attachment you want to remove.  
3 Press m.  
Creating a New Voice Record  
4 Select Unattach.  
1 While you are creating a message, scroll to any  
message field and press m. -or-  
Drafts  
While you are creating a message, you can save it  
in Drafts before you send it.  
Select Attach > [New Attachment].  
2 Select Record Voice.  
3 Say the message you want to record into the  
microphone.  
4 When you are finished recording, press O or  
press A under Save.  
5 When you are finished, press A under Done if  
Done is one of your options.  
You can view, edit, send, or delete saved drafts.  
Saving a Message in Drafts  
1 While you are creating a message, press m.  
2 Select Save In Drafts.  
You can continue to create the message. The  
version you saved in Drafts will not change.  
The voice record is attached to the message and  
saved to the Media Center and the list of voice  
records.  
Sending a Draft  
1 From the main menu, select Messages >  
Drafts.  
2 Scroll to the draft you want to send.  
3 Press m.  
96  
     
Multi-Media Messages  
4 Select Send.  
Sent Items  
Editing a Draft  
1 From the main menu, select Messages >  
Drafts.  
2 Select the draft you want to edit.  
3 Continue as you would when creating a  
message.  
Messages you have sent or tried to send are  
stored in Sent Items.  
Forwarding Sent Items  
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Sent  
Items.  
2 Scroll to the message you want to forward.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Forward.  
Deleting a Draft  
When you send a draft, it is deleted from Drafts.  
5 Edit and send your message.  
To delete a message in Drafts without sending it:  
You can add to and edit the message you are  
forwarding.  
1 Scroll to the message you want to delete.  
2 Press A under Delete.  
Resending Messages  
3 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
If a message was not sent from your phone, you  
can resend it.  
Drafts Icons  
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Sent  
M
w
L
Draft.  
Items.  
High priority.  
2 Scroll to the message you want to resend.  
3 Press A under Resend.  
Attachment.  
Note: If your message was sent successfully,  
y
High priority with an attachment.  
Resend will not appear as an option.  
97  
         
Receiving a Message  
Checking Delivery Status  
Sent Items Icons  
If a message was successfully sent and you set the  
message to give a report confirming delivery, you  
can check the delivery status:  
t
v
w
L
Successfully sent.  
Unsuccessfully sent.  
High priority.  
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Sent  
Items.  
2 Scroll to the message you want to view.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delivery Status.  
Attachment.  
z
y
High priority and locked.  
High priority with an attachment.  
Deleting a Message  
1 Scroll to the message you want to delete. -or-  
Receiving a Message  
When you receive an MMS message, a message  
notification appears on the display.  
View the message you want to delete.  
2 Press A under Delete.  
3 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
To view the message:  
1 Press O or press A under the display option on  
the left.  
The message is downloaded from the message  
server.  
2 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll  
to read it.  
To dismiss the message notification, press A  
under the display option on the right.  
This icon wappears on the display, reminding  
you that you have a new message.  
98  
       
Multi-Media Messages  
Note: Attachments that are of an unknown type  
cannot be opened, but they can be  
deleted. See “Deleting Attachments” on  
page 103.  
Navigating a Message  
As you scroll through a message, numbers, email  
addresses, and website URLs are highlighted.  
Pictures and audio recordings are also highlighted.  
Viewing a Slide Show  
Embedded Objects and Attachments  
Messages may contain pictures, videos. or audio  
recordings as part of the body of the message or  
as attachments.  
Your phone can receive MMS messages  
containing slide shows.  
A slide show may contain a series of pictures that  
display in sequence. It may also include one or  
more audio recordings.  
If a message contains pictures, videos or audio  
recordings in the body of the message, highlight  
each picture or audio recording to view or play it  
and select each video to view it.  
When you view a message containing a slide  
show, this icon i appears.  
To view a slide show in a message:  
If a message contains a picture, video, or audio  
recording as an attachment, open the attachment  
to view or play it.  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the slide show.  
3 Press O.  
Opening Attachments  
To open an attachment.  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the attachment you want to open.  
Attachments appear at the end of a message.  
To speed up the slide show, scroll right or scroll  
down.  
To repeat the part of the slide show you have just  
viewed, scroll left or scroll up.  
To view the slide show again, press A under  
Restart.  
3 Press O.  
Note: You can create and send MMS messages  
containing slide shows on  
www.boostmobile.com.  
99  
           
Viewing Received Messages From the Message Center  
Viewing Received Messages  
From the Message Center  
y
{
High priority with an attachment.  
High priority and locked, with an attachment.  
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Inbox.  
Actions for Received  
Messages  
Deleting  
2 Select the message you want to read.  
If you have not viewed the message before, the  
message is downloaded from the message  
server.  
3 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll  
Unread Messages  
to read it.  
1 Scroll to the message you want to delete.  
2 Press A under Delete.  
3 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Inbox Icons  
u Unread message.  
Read Messages  
T
Read message.  
1 Scroll to the message you want to delete. -or-  
View the message you want to delete.  
r Reply sent.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Delete Message.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
N
O
w
L
Forwarded.  
Locked.  
High priority.  
Replying  
See “Replying to a Message” on page 90.  
Attachment.  
x
z
Locked, with an attachment.  
High priority and locked.  
100  
             
Multi-Media Messages  
These numbers may appear in the From field, the  
To field, the Cc field, the subject line, or the body  
of the message.  
Forwarding  
1 View the message you want to forward. -or-  
If you have already viewed the message, scroll  
to it.  
Making a Phone Call  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the phone number you want to call.  
3 Press s.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Forward.  
4 Create and send your message.  
Making a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie Call  
Embedded objects and attachments are included  
when you forward a message.  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number you  
Locking and Unlocking  
When you lock a message, it cannot be deleted  
until you unlock it.  
want to call.  
3 Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button.  
Sending a Call Alert  
1 View the message you want to lock or unlock.  
1 View the message.  
-or-  
2 Highlight the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number.  
3 Press m.  
If you have already viewed the message, scroll  
to it.  
4 Select Alert.  
5 Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button.  
6 Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Lock Message or Unlock Message.  
Calling a Number in a Message  
If a message you receive contains a phone  
number, or BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number, you can  
call or send a call alert to that number.  
101  
     
Actions for Received Messages  
Storing Message Information to  
Contacts  
If a message you receive contains a phone  
number, BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number, or an  
email address, you can store this information to  
Contacts.  
Going to a Website  
If a message contains one or more website URLs,  
you can go to the website.  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the website URL you want to go to.  
3 Press m.  
These numbers may appear in the From field, the  
To field, the Cc field, the subject line, or the body  
of the message.  
4 Select Go To Website.  
Note: The entire URL must appear in the  
message. Otherwise, you cannot go to the  
website.  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the number or email address you want  
to save.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Save Number or Save E-mail.  
5 To store the number or email address as a new  
entry, select [New Contact]. -or-  
Saving an Embedded Picture, Video  
or Audio Recording  
To save a picture, video, or audio recording that is  
part of the body of a message you receive:  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the picture, video or audio recording  
you want to save.  
To store the number or email address to an  
existing entry, select the entry.  
6 With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll  
left or right to display the Contacts type you want  
to assign the number or email address.  
7 If you want to add more information to the entry,  
follow the applicable instructions in “Creating  
Entries” on page 59.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Save Picture, Save Video, or Save  
Audio.  
Pictures, videos and audio recordings are saved to  
the default storage location.  
8 Press A under Done.  
102  
       
Multi-Media Messages  
Note: Some types of pictures, videos, and audio  
recordings can be viewed or played, but  
not saved.  
Note: Some types of pictures, videos, and audio  
recordings can be viewed or played, but  
not saved.  
Deleting an Embedded Picture, Video  
or Audio Recording  
Deleting Attachments  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the attachment you want to delete.  
3 Press m.  
To delete a picture, video, or audio recording that  
is part of the body of a message you receive:  
4 Select Delete Attachment.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the picture, video, or audio recording  
you want to delete.  
Saving Slide Shows  
3 Press m.  
When viewing a slide show in a message you have  
received, you can save the parts of the slide show.  
4 Select Delete Picture, Delete Video, or Delete  
Audio.  
If the slide show contains pictures, you can save  
each picture as it appears. If the slide show  
contains audio recordings, you can save each  
audio recording at any time during the slide show.  
Saving Attachments  
1 View the message.  
2 Highlight the attachment you want to save.  
3 Press m.  
Saving Pictures  
4 Select Save Attachment.  
1 View the slide show.  
Pictures, videos, and audio recordings are saved  
to the phone’s memory or the memory card,  
depending on the storage preference you chose.  
You can access these saved items through the  
Media Center.  
2 When the picture you want to save appears,  
press m.  
3 Select Save Picture.  
103  
       
Customizing MMS  
Saving Audio  
•
•
•
Quick Notes — lets you create new Quick  
Notes and edit or delete Quick Notes you have  
created.  
1 View the slide show.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Save Audio.  
4 If the slide show contains more than one audio  
recording, a list of the audio recordings appears.  
Select the audio recording you want to save.  
Replies — lets you create new reply phrases  
and edit or delete reply phrases you have  
created.  
Cleanup — controls how long messages remain  
in the Inbox and Sent Items before they are  
deleted. See “Setting the Clean-up Option” on  
page 105.  
Deleting Slide Shows  
1 Highlight the slide show or view the slide show.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Delete Slideshow.  
To access the Setup menu:  
1 From the main menu, select Messages.  
2 With [Create Message] highlighted, press m.  
3 Select Setup.  
Customizing MMS  
The Setup menu lets you customize MMS for your  
phone:  
Tip: This option is available from many  
context-sensitive menus when you are  
using MMS.  
•
Friendly Name — Enter text here to create a  
friendly name. Your friendly name is the name  
displayed in the From field on other iDEN  
phones when they receive messages from you.  
New Quick Notes and Reply Phrases  
Creating  
1 From the Setup menu, select Quick Notes or  
•
Signature — Enter text here to create a  
signature. Your signature is text that is  
automatically inserted at the end of all  
messages you create. You can edit the text  
before sending the message.  
Replies.  
2 Select [New Quicknote] or [New Reply]. -or-  
Press A under New.  
3 Enter text from the keypad.  
104  
       
Multi-Media Messages  
4 When you are finished, press O.  
3 Select Delete All.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Editing  
You can edit only Quick Notes and reply phrases  
you have created.  
Setting the Clean-up Option  
The clean-up option controls how long messages  
remain in the Inbox and Sent Items before they are  
deleted. You set the clean-up option for the Inbox  
and Sent Items separately.  
1 From the Setup menu, select Quick Notes or  
Replies.  
2 Select the Quick Note or reply phrase you want  
to edit.  
3 Edit the text.  
4 When you are finished, press O.  
The clean-up option deletes only read, unlocked  
messages.  
Clean-up Options  
Deleting  
•
Off — Messages are never automatically  
deleted.  
You can delete only Quick Notes and reply phrases  
you have created.  
•
5 Messages — If you have more than 5  
messages, messages are deleted in the order  
they were received, starting with the oldest, until  
5 are left.  
To delete a Quick Note or reply phrase:  
1 From the Setup menu, select Quick Notes or  
Replies.  
2 Scroll to the Quick Note or reply phrase you  
want to delete.  
3 Press A under Delete.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
•
10 Messages — If you have more than 10  
messages, messages are deleted in the order  
they were received, starting with the oldest, until  
10 are left.  
•
•
1 Day — Messages are deleted if they are older  
than 1 day.  
To delete all Quick Notes or all reply phrases:  
3 Days — Messages are deleted if they are  
older than 3 days  
1 From the Setup menu, select Quick Notes or  
Replies.  
2 Press m.  
105  
   
Managing Memory  
•
Custom — Lets you create a clean-up option of  
If you set an option that cleans up messages  
according to how old the messages are, messages  
are deleted when you power on your phone.  
up to 99 messages or 99 days.  
For the Inbox  
1 From the Setup menu, select Cleanup > Inbox.  
2 Choose a clean-up option.  
3 To automatically delete messages now, press O  
or press A under Yes. -or-  
Managing Memory  
All messages in the Inbox, Drafts, and Sent Items  
share the same memory space.  
Note: The content of a message in the Inbox is  
not stored in your phone’s memory until  
the message is read. Unread messages  
use very little memory.  
To delete messages later, press A under No.  
For Sent Items  
1 From the Setup menu, select Cleanup > Sent  
Items.  
2 Choose a clean-up option.  
To view your used memory, free memory, and  
memory capacity:  
1 From the main menu, select Messages.  
2 With [Create Message] highlighted, press m.  
3 Select Setup > Memory Size.  
3 To automatically delete messages now, press O  
or press A under Yes. -or-  
To delete messages later, press A under No.  
Tip: This option is available from many  
context-sensitive menus when you are  
using MMS.  
Choosing to Delete Messages Later  
If you choose to delete messages later, rather than  
at the time you set the clean-up option, the type of  
clean-up option you set determines when  
messages are deleted.  
To free memory, delete messages.  
To delete many messages at once, see “Deleting  
All Messages” on page 107.  
If you set an option that cleans up messages  
according to how many you have, messages are  
deleted when you exit the message center after  
setting the option.  
To set messages to be deleted automatically, see  
“Setting the Clean-up Option” on page 105.  
106  
   
Multi-Media Messages  
Note: Messages are stored in your phone using  
the same memory space used to store  
Java application data, items accessible  
through the Media Center, and voice  
records created when your phone is in a  
call. Deleting some of these other items  
frees memory for messages.  
Deleting All Messages  
To delete all read, unlocked messages from the  
Inbox, all messages in Drafts, or all successfully  
sent messages in Sent Items:  
1 Scroll to Inbox, Draft, or Sent Items.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Delete All.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
107  
   
•
•
To change your greeting, press 3.  
To access your personal options, press 4.  
Boost Mobile® Voice Mail  
Note: To receive voice mail messages, you must  
If you press * while you are in a sub-menu, you  
will go to the previous menu. If you press **,  
you will go to the main voice mail menu. From the  
main voice mail menu, press # to exit voice mail.  
At any time, you may end the call by pressing e.  
first set up your voice mail box.  
Setting Up Your Voice Mail  
Box  
Using your i875 phone, dial your 10-digit Boost  
Mobile Personal Telephone Number (PTN). For  
example: 7035557777. The last 7 digits of your  
Personal Telephone Number (PTN) is your  
temporary password. For example 5557777.  
Follow the instructions to create a new 4- to 7-digit  
password, record your name, and greeting. When  
the system says, “Thank you for using Boost  
Mobile Voice Mail,” your mail box is set up.  
Playing Messages  
When you receive a new voice mail message, you  
can either listen to it immediately by pressing A  
under Call, or later by pressing A under Exit.  
These are options available while you are listening  
to your messages:  
•
•
Backup — press 1.  
Rewind to beginning of message — press  
11.  
If you are calling from a phone other than your  
i875, dial your 10-digit BoostTM PTN. When you  
hear the greeting, press the star key to access your  
voice mail box. The system will prompt you to enter  
your password.  
•
Pause or continue the current message — press  
2.  
•
•
•
Fast forward — press 3.  
Fast forward to end of message — press 33.  
Play the date and time stamp — press 55.  
You are in the main voice mail menu when you  
hear the options listed below.  
•
To play your messages, press 1. (This option  
plays only if you have new or saved messages.)  
These options are available while a message is  
playing or after it has played:  
•
To record a message, press 2.  
108  
             
Boost Mobile® Voice Mail  
•
Forward the message to another subscriber —  
Note: It is important that you choose a number  
that is easy for you to remember, but hard  
for someone else to guess. Passwords  
using all the same digits, for example  
4,4,4,4 or a sequential series of digits,  
1,2,3,4, will not be accepted.  
press 6.  
•
•
•
•
Delete the message — press 7.  
Reply to a message — press 8.  
Save the message — press 9.  
Skip to the next message — press #.  
5 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
Note: If you forget your password, contact  
Messages that are not saved or deleted remain in  
your mail box as new messages. All messages are  
automatically deleted after 21 days.  
Customer Care.  
Recording Your Name  
When you send, reply to, or copy a message, your  
name response precedes the message. To record  
or re-record your name at any time:  
To retrieve deleted messages, press * 3. This  
option only applies to the current voice mail  
session. If you end the call, the messages will be  
permanently deleted.  
Important: After exiting the voice mail session, you  
cannot recover deleted messages.  
1 From the main voice mail menu, press 4 to  
access personal options.  
2 Press 4 to access personal preferences.  
3 Press 3 to access the record your name  
option.  
Changing Your Password  
1 From the main voice mail menu, press 4 to  
access personal options.  
4 Press 2 to record your name.  
2 Press 4 to access personal preferences.  
3 Press 1 to modify password.  
4 Enter your new password. It must be 4 to 7 digits  
long.  
5 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
Recording Your Active Greeting  
You may want to include one or all of the following  
options in your greeting so that callers will know  
they are available.  
109  
         
Advanced Voice Mail Features  
To record additional greetings:  
•
•
Press 1 to send a numeric message.  
Press 2 to send an operator-assisted message.  
(This option is available only if you are a  
subscriber of Operator Assisted Messaging.  
Contact BoostTM Customer Care for more  
information.)  
Press # to skip the greeting and record a  
message immediately.  
1 From the main voice mail menu, press 3 to  
access the greetings menu.  
2 Press 4 to modify greetings.  
3 Enter the greeting number you wish to create or  
modify.  
4 Press 2 to record a greeting.  
•
5 Record your greeting and press # when you  
have finished.  
To record or alter your greeting at any time:  
1 From the main voice mail menu, press 3 to  
6 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
change your greeting.  
To select your active greeting:  
2 Press 1 to play, press 2 to record or  
re-record, or press 7 to delete your active  
greeting.  
3 Record your greeting and press # when you  
have finished.  
4 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
Advanced Voice Mail Features  
Multiple Greetings  
1 From the main voice mail menu, press 3 to  
access the greetings menu.  
2 Press 3 to select another greeting to be active.  
3 Enter the number of the greeting that you would  
like to be active. The system will confirm your  
active greeting number.  
4 Press 1 to play your active greeting.  
5 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
You can create up to five different greetings and  
designate which greeting will be your active  
greeting at any given time. The greeting that was  
recorded during your initial voice mail box setup is  
greeting 1. This is your default active greeting.  
110  
 
Boost Mobile® Voice Mail  
Greetings Schedule  
Automatic Playback  
You can choose to have your greetings  
By default, the playback mode of your voice mail  
service is set to normal. This feature automatically  
plays and saves new messages when you log in.  
To activate automatic playback:  
automatically activated based on a pre-determined  
time schedule. By activating the Greeting  
Schedule, Greetings 1, 2, and 3 will automatically  
play according to the time schedule listed below.  
1 From the main voice mail menu, press 4 to  
access personal options.  
2 Press 4 to access personal preferences.  
3 Press 2 to access playback preferences.  
4 Press 2 to switch between automatic and  
normal playback.  
5 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
Greeting 1 Evenings and 5:00 pm – 7:59 am,  
Weekends  
Monday – Friday  
24-hours, Saturday  
and Sunday  
Greeting 2 Weekday  
Mornings  
8:00 am – 11:59 am  
Monday – Friday  
Changing the Playback Order of Messages  
Greeting 3 Weekday  
Afternoons  
Noon – 4:59 pm  
Monday – Friday  
You can select the order in which you want  
unheard messages to be played. You may listen to  
the last received message first, or you may listen to  
the first received message first. To select the order  
in which new messages should be played:  
To activate the greeting schedule:  
1 From the main voice mail menu, press 3 to  
access the greetings menu.  
1 From the main voice mail menu, press 4 to  
2 Press 9 to activate your greeting schedule.  
3 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
Note: The greeting schedule, when on, will  
override any other greeting that you may  
set as active. If a greeting is not recorded,  
a system standard greeting will be played.  
access personal options.  
2 Press 4 to access personal preferences.  
3 Press 2 to access playback preferences.  
4 Press 1 to switch between the playback  
orders.  
5 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
111  
Advanced Voice Mail Features  
Recording, Forwarding, and Replying to  
Messages  
Delivery Options  
After you have created a message, you can assign  
the message to a category before you send it.  
Below is a list of the options that can be applied to  
a message:  
These functions allow you to record and send,  
reply to, or forward a message to an assigned  
destination address list number. If you record a  
complete or partial message, but do not send it,  
Boost Mobile® Voice Mail service will refer to this  
message as an “in preparation” message.  
•
Urgent — Recipient will hear this message  
before other messages.  
•
Boost Walkie-Talkie — Recipient cannot copy  
the message to another mail box or phone  
number.  
Notification of Non-Delivery — You will be  
notified if the recipient has not listened to your  
message by a certain date and time.  
Future Delivery — You can specify a time and  
date (up to three months in advance) for the  
message to be delivered.  
To record and send a message:  
1 From the main voice mail menu, press 2 to  
record a message.  
2 Record your message and press # to end the  
message.  
3 Press 9 at the prompt to indicate that you want  
to send the message or press 5 for delivery  
options.  
•
•
4 Enter the mail box number list number(s). (A  
mail box number is the 10-digit Boost Mobile®  
PTN of a Boost Mobile customer. The Boost  
Mobile® customer must be in your local calling  
area. The name of the recipient plays if it is  
recorded.)  
5 Press # to send.  
6 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
Note: You can only send messages using this  
method to Boost Mobile® customers in  
your home market.  
Note: All dates must have digits in the MM/DD  
format (2 digits for the month and 2 digits  
for the date). For example, January 2nd  
would be 0102.  
Important: Once a message has been sent for  
future delivery, it cannot be retrieved or  
deleted.  
To set a special delivery option:  
1 After recording your message, but before  
sending it, press 5 for delivery options.  
112  
Boost Mobile® Voice Mail  
2 Press the number that corresponds with the  
To modify forwarding options:  
desired delivery option:  
1 From the main voice mail menu, press 4 to  
access personal options.  
2 Press 5 to modify forwarding options.  
3 Select the applicable option below:  
•
•
•
Press 1 for urgent.  
Press 2 for private.  
Press 3 for notification of non-delivery. At  
prompt, specify time and date.  
•
•
To create a forwarding number, press 2.  
If you have already created a forwarding  
number, press 2 to modify the number.  
•
•
Press 4 for future delivery of messages. At  
prompt, specify time and date.  
Press 9 to send the message immediately.  
•
To enable or disable message forwarding,  
press 3.  
3 The list of options will be presented again.  
Select an additional option or press 9 to send  
the message.  
4 Enter the destination mail box list number of the  
recipient(s).  
•
To change the forwarding type, press 2.  
4 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
5 Press # to send.  
6 Press ** to return to the main menu.  
5
Message Forwarding  
Note: You can only forward messages to Boost  
Mobile® customers in your home market.  
This feature allows you to program your phone to  
automatically forward incoming messages to  
another mail box. There are two types of  
forwarding: notified and silent. Notified forwarding  
prompts the caller that the message will be  
forwarded. Silent forwarding does not prompt the  
caller that the message will be forwarded.  
113  
 
2 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll  
SMS  
SMS Messages  
Short Message Service (SMS) messages are short  
text messages, also called text and numeric  
messages. You can send SMS messages through  
any email account or on www.boostmobile.com.  
to read it.  
3 To keep the message, press O. -or-  
To delete the message, scroll to the end of the  
message, then press A under Delete.  
To dismiss the message notification:  
If the flip is closed, press .. -or-  
Your phone receives SMS messages sent to its  
SMS address, but does not send SMS messages.  
If the flip is open, press A under Back or close  
the flip.  
Your phone's SMS address is your  
[email protected].  
This icon wappears on the display, reminding  
you that you have a new message.  
If your phone is powered off when you receive a  
message, your phone notifies you the next time  
you power it on. If you are out of your coverage  
area, your phone alerts you when you return to  
your coverage area.  
Reading from the Message Center  
1 From the main menu, select Messages > SMS.  
2 Select the message you want to read.  
3 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll  
to read it.  
4 To keep the message, press O. -or-  
Your phone attempts to deliver these messages for  
up to 7 days.  
To delete the message, scroll to the end of the  
Receiving a Message  
When you receive a text and numeric message,  
New Text Message appears on the display.  
message, then press A under Delete.  
Calling and Storing Numbers  
To view the message:  
If an SMS message you receive contains a phone  
number, you can call that number by pressing s  
while viewing the message.  
1 Press A under Read.  
114  
         
SMS  
If an SMS message you receive contains a phone  
number, BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number, or  
Talkgroup ID, you can call or send a call alert to  
that number, or store that number to Contacts.  
Press m while viewing the message to access  
these options.  
To call the number, select Call Back.  
To send a call alert, select Alert, then press the  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button.  
To store the number to Contacts, select Store  
Number.  
115  
Note: The first time you access Web, you will be  
asked to enable security to ensure your  
information remains private and secure.  
BoostTM Wireless Web  
Services  
•
Press A under Yes. The phone will display:  
Generating…, Computing…, Sending))))).  
You can use your phone’s Web feature to access a  
suite of wireless data products known as BoostTM  
Wireless Web. Services include Text Messaging,  
Web and Premium Web, Address Book, Mobile  
Email, and wireless access to AOL® Instant  
•
You may be asked to (re)enable security as  
BoostTM adds new services or upon your  
return to the U.S. after traveling.  
•
When transmitting highly personal or sensitive  
data, such as a credit card number, you will  
MessengerTM  
.
With the exception of the Text Messaging Express  
service, BoostTM Wireless Web Services require  
the activation of a BoostTM Wireless Web service  
plan. To order, go to www.boostmobile.com or call  
1-888-BOOST-4U (1-888-266-7848). You can also  
contact your BoostTM Authorized Dealership.  
see the Secure Data icon E. This icon  
indicates that the data is encrypted during  
transmission.  
5 Scroll to highlight the service you wish to access  
and press A under Ok. -or-  
Press the number shown to the left to  
automatically jump to that service.  
Starting the Microbrowser  
Just as you use Netscape Navigator® or Microsoft®  
Internet Explorer to browse the Web from your  
desktop, the microbrowser allows you to explore  
and use a variety of Internet services. To begin  
using the BoostTM Wireless Web:  
Press * to return to the previous screen.  
To return to the home page, press e.  
6 To exit the browser, press e until the idle  
screen displays. -or-  
Press and hold m. The Browser Menu screen  
1 Press m to access the Main Menu.  
2 Scroll to Web.  
3 Press A under SELECT.  
4 Your home page displays.  
displays with Exit Browser highlighted.  
Press A under OK. When you re-enter Web,  
you will enter on the page from which you exited.  
116  
         
BoostTM Wireless Web Services  
BoostTM Wireless Web Navigation  
Keys  
For more information and multimedia demos, go to  
www.boostmobile.com. You can also get one page  
service-specific guides called Frequently Asked  
Questions and other instruction for BoostTM  
•
Home — Press e to return to your home page.  
Wireless Web Services at www.boostmobile.com.  
Tip: Press e twice to return to your phone's  
idle screen.  
•
•
Back — Press * to return to a previous  
screen.  
Scroll — A scroll bar on the left of the phone’s  
display indicates that additional text can be  
viewed. Scroll using the navigation key.  
Tip: While navigating through BoostTM Wireless  
screens, a number may appear to the left of  
the application or topic you want to access.  
Press the corresponding number on the  
keypad for quicker access to that  
application or topic.  
When transmitting highly personal or sensitive  
data, such as a credit card number, this icon  
Eappears, indicating that the data is encrypted  
during transmission.  
Note: You may be asked to (re)enable security  
as Boost Mobile® Mobile adds new  
services or upon your return to the U.S.  
after traveling.  
117  
Accessing the Camera  
Camera  
From the main menu, select Camera. -or-  
The camera in your i875 phone takes pictures and  
records videos. You can save these pictures and  
videos in your phone’s memory or the memory  
card, depending on the storage preference you  
chose. You can access these saved pictures and  
videos through the Media Center.  
Press c. -or-  
Access the camera from the Media Center. See  
“Accessing the Camera” on page 134. -or-  
If you set the camera as a power up application  
under Settings, then press p to power up your  
phone.  
You can send the pictures you take in MMS  
messages, in BoostTM walkie-talkie calls, or with  
Bluetooth. You can assign them to Contacts  
entries or set them as your phone’s wallpaper.  
Taking Pictures  
1 Access the camera.  
2 If you want to adjust the zoom, spotlight, picture  
quality, picture size, or a timer, set these options.  
See “Setting Picture Options”.  
3 Aim the camera lens on the flip. Use the internal  
display as the viewfinder.  
4 When the image you want to capture is in view,  
press c or press O or press A under Capture.  
Note: If you insert the memory card into the  
phone now, you are prompted to save the  
picture you have just captured to the  
memory card. Choosing to save the  
picture to the memory card does not  
change your storage preferences after the  
picture is saved.  
You can send the videos you record in MMS  
messages.  
The pictures the camera takes are JPEG files.  
The videos the camera records have the following  
files formats:  
•
•
•
•
H.263 video format  
128 kbps bit rate for 176 x 144 resolution  
64 kbps bit rate for 128 x 96 resolution  
AMR audio format with 4.75 kbps bit rate  
118  
                 
Camera  
5 To save the picture, press c or press O. -or-  
Zoom  
To discard the picture without saving it, press  
The Zoom option lets you choose a closer view.  
The values are:  
A under Discard. -or-  
To choose another action, see “More Actions for  
Captured Pictures” on page 120.  
•
•
•
1X — no change  
2X — twice as large  
4X — 4 times as large  
Setting Picture Options  
When you take a picture, you can set the zoom,  
spotlight, picture quality, picture size, and set a  
timer to delay capturing the picture.  
1X is the default.  
Spotlight  
The Spotlight option turns on or off the camera’s  
spotlight to provide additional light for close-up  
pictures.  
To set any of these options:  
1 Press m.  
2 Select the option you want.  
3 Select the value you want for that option.  
Tip: You can also set zoom from the viewfinder  
by scrolling up and down and set picture  
size by scrolling left and right.  
Off is the default.  
Picture Quality  
The Picture Quality option lets you choose the  
sharpness the picture will have after it is captured.  
The values are:  
If you either discard the picture or save it by either  
pressing O or selecting Save from the  
context-sensitive menu, the only picture option that  
changes is the timer. The timer returns to its  
default: Off.  
•
•
Normal — no change  
Fine — higher resolution  
When you receive your phone, Normal is the  
default. You can choose a new default for this  
option. See “Customizing the Camera” on page  
124.  
If you choose any other action, all picture options  
return to their defaults.  
119  
     
More Actions for Captured Pictures  
Pictures taken with this option set to Fine use more  
memory space.  
More Actions for Captured  
Pictures  
Picture Size  
After you capture a picture as described in “Taking  
Pictures” on page 118, you can send it in an MMS  
message, in BoostTM walkie-talkie calls, or with  
Bluetooth. You can assign them to Contacts  
entries or set them as your phone’s wallpaper  
The Picture Size option lets you choose the size  
the picture will have after it is captured.  
From smallest to largest, the values are: Small,  
Medium, Wallpaper, Large, XLarge, and Max.  
If you plan to use the image as wallpaper, it is best  
to select the Wallpaper size.  
You can also access the Media Center to view and  
perform actions on the pictures there.  
When you receive your phone, Medium is the  
default. You can choose a new default for this  
option. See “Customizing the Camera” on page  
124.  
Choosing any of these options automatically saves  
the captured picture.  
Sending a Picture in a MMS Message  
1 After you have captured a picture, press A  
Larger pictures use more memory space.  
under Send.  
Self-Timer  
2 Create and send the message. The picture is  
automatically included as an attachment.  
The Self-Timer option lets you delay capturing the  
picture for the number of seconds you choose.The  
camera captures the picture after the amount of  
time you chose elapses.  
Sending In BoostTM walkie-talkie Calls  
1 After you have captured a picture, press m.  
To turn off the timer before the picture is captured,  
press A under Cancel.  
2 Select WT Send Picture.  
A list of names from Contacts appears. These  
names have BoostTM walkie-talkie numbers and  
IP addresses stored.  
The values are: Off, 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20  
seconds.  
Off is the default.  
120  
   
Camera  
3 Select the name of the person you want to send  
Assigning to Contacts  
1 After you have captured a picture, press m.  
2 Select Set As Caller ID.  
3 To store the picture to a new entry, select [New  
Contact]. -or-  
the picture to.  
4 Press the BoostTM walkie-talkie button to send  
the picture.  
5 Wait while the picture is transmitted. The  
BoostTM walkie-talkie call is temporarily  
interrupted while a picture is transmitted.  
6 When prompted, press the BoostTM walkie-talkie  
button to resume the Walkie-Talkie call.  
To store the picture to an existing entry, select  
the entry.  
Only entries that include phone numbers are  
displayed. This icon g appears next to entries  
that have pictures assigned.  
Send with Bluetooth  
You must set up your phone to send items with  
Bluetooth before sending a picture. See  
“Bluetooth®” on page 143.  
4 If you selected an entry with a picture assigned,  
press O or press A under Yes to overwrite the  
assigned picture. -or-  
1 After you have captured a picture, press m.  
2 Select Transfer.  
Press A under No to return to the list of entries  
without overwriting the assigned picture.  
3 Select Bluetooth.  
4 Select the device you want to transfer to. -or-  
Setting as Wallpaper  
1 After you have captured a picture, press m.  
2 Select Set As Wallpaper.  
Search for the device you want to transfer to by  
selecting [Find Devices].  
5 If prompted, bond with the device.  
Your phone connects to the device and transfers  
the picture.  
121  
   
Recording Videos  
To view the video without saving it, press m and  
select Review. -or-  
Recording Videos  
Recording a video is similar to taking a picture. If  
you store videos you record in phone memory, you  
can record videos up to 30 seconds long. If you  
record video onto the memory card, the video  
length is limited by how much memory is available  
on the card.  
To discard the video without saving it, press A  
under Discard.  
Setting Video Options  
When you record a video, you can set the zoom,  
spotlight, video size, and video length, and set a  
timer to delay capturing the picture.  
1 Access the camera.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Record Video.  
4 If you want to adjust the zoom, spotlight, picture  
quality, picture size, or a timer, set these options.  
See “Setting Video Options”.  
5 Aim the camera lens on the flip. Use the internal  
display as the viewfinder.  
6 If you want to zoom in or out, scroll up or down.  
If you want to change the image size, scroll left  
or right.  
To set any of these options:  
1 Press m.  
2 Select the option you want.  
3 Select the value you want for that option.  
Tip: You can also set zoom from the viewfinder  
by scrolling up and down and set picture  
size by scrolling left and right.  
Zoom  
The Zoom option lets you choose a closer view.  
The values are:  
7 When you are ready to record, press and  
release c, press and release O, or press and  
release A under Record. Releasing the key  
starts the recording.  
8 If you want to end the video, press c or press  
A under Stop.  
•
•
•
1X — no change  
2X — twice as large  
4X — 4 times as large  
9 To save the video, press c or press O. -or-  
1X is the default.  
122  
       
Camera  
Spotlight  
Sending a Video in a MMS Message  
The Spotlight option turns on or off the camera’s  
spotlight to provide additional light for close-up  
videos.  
1 After you have record a video, press m and  
select Send Message.  
2 Create and send the message. The video is  
automatically included as an attachment.  
Off is the default.  
Video Size  
Changing Storage Preference  
While you are using the camera, you can choose  
whether media items are saved to your phone’s  
memory or to the memory card.  
The Video Size option lets you choose the size the  
picture will have after it is recorded.  
The values are: Min (128 x 96) and Max (176 x  
144).  
1 Access the camera.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Memory Card > Store Media.  
4 Select On Phone to set your phone to save  
media items to the phone’s memory. -or-  
Video Length  
The Video Length options let you choose how long  
you can record video.  
The values are:  
•
Short (for messages) — limits the video length to  
8 seconds.  
Select Prefer On Card to set your phone to  
save media items to the memory card if it is in  
the phone. If the memory card is not in the  
phone, even if you choose Prefer On Card, the  
media items are saved to your phone’s memory.  
•
Maximum — the maximum video length is  
determined by where you store videos you  
record. If you store videos you record in phone  
memory, you can record videos up to 30  
seconds long. If you record video onto a  
memory card, the video length is limited by how  
much memory is available on the memory card.  
The location that you choose becomes the Store  
Media option in Settings.  
123  
     
Accessing the Media Center  
•
Default Video Size — sets the default value for  
the Video Size option.  
Accessing the Media Center  
You can access the Media Center from the camera  
at any time, except when you are using the  
Camera Setup menu or viewing the memory  
screen.  
Note: The volume of the shutter sound is  
controlled by your phone’s speaker  
volume.To set your phone’s speaker  
volume, see “Setting the Volume” on page  
179.  
1 Press m.  
2 Select Media Center.  
To access the Camera Setup menu:  
1 Access the camera.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Camera Setup.  
Tip: This option is available from many  
context-sensitive menus when you are  
using the camera.  
Customizing the Camera  
The Camera Setup menu lets you customize the  
camera:  
•
Ask for Name — If you set this option to On,  
you are prompted to enter a name for each  
picture before you save it. Otherwise, pictures  
are automatically saved with the date and a  
number as their names.  
Managing Memory  
While you are taking pictures, the percentage of  
free memory in the default storage location  
appears on the screen. To view details about  
memory on either the memory card or your phone,  
access the Memory Usage screen.  
If the camera is currently ready to take pictures,  
you can set these picture set-up options:  
•
Default Size — sets the default value for the  
Picture Size option.  
•
Default Quality — sets the default value for the  
Picture Quality option.  
To view your used memory, free memory, and  
memory capacity:  
If the camera is currently ready to record video,  
you can set this video set-up options:  
1 Access the camera.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Memory Usage.  
124  
       
Camera  
Tip: This option is available from many  
context-sensitive menus when you are  
using the camera.  
To free memory on your phone, delete items from  
the Media Center, messages in the message  
center, voice records, or Java applications. To free  
memory on the memory card, delete items from the  
card’s folders.  
125  
Pictures, videos, and audio recordings accessible  
through the Media Center can be sent in MMS  
messages. Multi-Media messages size limits apply  
when attaching items from the Media Center. See  
“Multi-Media Messages” on page 86.  
Media Center  
The Media Center lets you access pictures, videos,  
and audio recordings stored in your phone’s  
memory or on the memory card inserted in your  
phone.  
Viewing the Media Center  
To access the Media Center:  
All pictures and videos stored in your phone’s  
memory can be accessed through the Media  
Center.  
From the main menu, select Media Center. -or-  
The following audio recordings can be accessed  
through the Media Center:  
From the camera, press m. Select Media  
Center.  
•
Voice records created when your phone was not  
in a call  
Scroll to view the items in the Media Center.  
•
•
Musical ringtones in the list of ringtones  
Audio recordings saved from MMS messages  
you received  
Choosing Thumbnail View or List  
View  
You can set the Media Center to show a thumbnail  
of each picture as you view the list of items or show  
the list of items without thumbnails.  
•
Audio recordings you downloaded to your phone  
Because the memory card inserted in your phone  
may contain files saved to it using a device other  
than your phone, not all types of pictures, videos,  
and audio recordings on the memory card may be  
accessed through your phone’s Media Center.  
To change views:  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Set View.  
4 Select Plain List View or Thumbnail List View.  
For information on determining whether the files on  
the memory card can be access through the Media  
Center, see “Ensuring Files on the Memory Card  
Are Compatible With Your Phone” on page 26.  
126  
         
Media Center  
•
•
•
Phone: Video — all videos in your phone’s  
Filtering by Media Type  
memory.  
You can set the Media Center to show all types of  
media items, only pictures, only videos, or only  
audio recordings. If you have the memory card in  
your phone, the items stored in your phone’s  
memory are listed separately from the items stored  
on the memory card.  
Card: All — all items on the memory card that  
are accessible through the Media Center.  
Card: Pictures — all pictures on the memory  
card that are accessible through the Media  
Center.  
•
•
Card: Audio — all audio recordings on the  
memory card that are accessible through the  
Media Center.  
Card: Video — all videos on the memory card  
that are accessible through the Media Center.  
If you do not have the memory card in your phone,  
you have these filtering options:  
•
All — all items accessible through the Media  
Center.  
•
•
Pictures — all pictures.  
Audio — all audio recordings accessible  
through the Media Center.  
Setting Filtering  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Press m.  
•
Video — all videos.  
3 Select Filter.  
4 Select the filtering option you want.  
If you have the memory card in your phone, you  
have these filtering options:  
Tip: You can also scroll through these options  
while viewing the list of items by either  
scrolling left or right or pressing * or #.  
•
•
•
Phone: All — all items in your phone’s memory  
that are accessible through the Media Center.  
Phone: Pictures — all pictures in your phone’s  
memory.  
Phone: Audio — all audio recordings in your  
phone’s memory that are accessible through the  
Media Center.  
127  
 
Forward Locked Items  
Keeping the Last Filter Setting  
3 Select Setup.  
4 Select Sort.  
5 Select By Time or By Name.  
You can set the Media Center to show all items  
every time you access it or to keep the filtering  
setting you had when you last viewed it.  
When you receive your phone, the Media Center is  
set to sort items by time.  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Setup.  
4 Select Remember Filter.  
5 Select On to keep the filtering setting you had  
when you last viewed the Media Center.  
Forward Locked Items  
Some items saved to the Media Center from MMS  
messages, BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls, or by  
downloading may be forward locked. Forward  
locked items are usually copyright protected, and  
you cannot share them with anyone, such as in  
MMS messages or BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls, or  
by uploading them from your phone.  
When you receive your phone, the Media Center is  
set to show all items every time you access it.  
Accessing Items Listed  
To access a picture, video, or audio recording,  
select it from the list of items in the Media Center.  
You cannot remove forward locking from an item.  
When you view items in the Media Center, one of  
these icons appears next to each forward locked  
item:  
With an item selected, scroll right or left to access  
the items that appear before and after it in the list.  
Forward locked.  
f
c
Sorting by Time or Name  
You can set the Media Center to sort items by the  
time the item was created or by the name of the  
item.  
Forward lock and locked.  
When an item is locked, it cannot be deleted from  
the Media Center. See “Locking Items” on page  
132. Locking an item has no effect on its forward  
locking.  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Press m.  
128  
     
Media Center  
Viewing  
DRM Items  
To view a picture, select it from the list of items in  
the Media Center.  
Except for Java applications, which download to  
Java Apps, the default location for any DRM items  
that you download is the Media Center. Depending  
on the storage preference you have chosen, these  
items may be saved to your phone’s memory or the  
memory card inserted in your phone.  
If your phone is set to show thumbnails, a  
thumbnail of each picture appears next to the  
picture in the list of items. If your phone is not set to  
show thumbnails, this icon g appears next to the  
picture.  
Depending on how a given third-party vendor has  
set rights for an item, the item may include the  
following status icons.  
To see a larger or smaller view of the picture you  
are viewing:  
1 Press m.  
2 Select Zoom.  
3 Select the zoom option you want.  
c
e
The item is a DRM item.  
The DRM item has expired.  
All DRM items are forward locked. As with other  
items in the Media Center, you can lock DRM  
items. See “Locking Items” on page 132.  
If the picture does not fit in the display, scroll left  
and right and up and down to view different parts of  
the picture.  
Sending in a Message  
1 Scroll to or select the picture you want to include  
in a message.  
Pictures  
The Media Center lets you view pictures, send  
them in MMS messages, in BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
calls, with Bluetooth. You can assign them to  
Contacts entries or set them as your phone’s  
wallpaper.  
2 Press A under Send.  
3 Create and send the message. The picture you  
selected is automatically included as an  
attachment.  
129  
             
Pictures  
Sending In BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
Calls  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Transfer.  
4 Select Bluetooth.  
1 Scroll to or select the picture you want to send in  
a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call.  
5 Select the device you want to transfer to. -or-  
2 Press m.  
3 Select WT Send Picture.  
Search for the device you want to transfer to by  
selecting [Find Devices].  
6 If prompted, bond with the device.  
A list of names from Contacts appears. These  
names have BoostTM Walkie-Talkie numbers  
and IP addresses stored.  
Your phone connects to the device and transfers  
the picture.  
4 Select the name of the person you want to send  
Assigning to Contacts  
1 Scroll to or select the picture you want to assign  
to a Contacts entry.  
the picture to.  
5 Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button to send  
the picture.  
6 Wait while the picture is transmitted. The  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call is temporarily  
interrupted while a picture is transmitted.  
7 When prompted, press the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie button to resume the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie call.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Set As Caller ID.  
4 To store the picture to a new entry, select [New  
Contact]. -or-  
To store the picture to an existing entry, select  
the entry.  
Send with Bluetooth  
You must set up your phone to send items with  
Bluetooth before sending a picture. See  
“Bluetooth®” on page 143.  
Only entries that include phone numbers are  
displayed. This icon g appears next to entries  
that have pictures assigned.  
5 If you selected an entry with a picture assigned,  
press O or press A under Yes to overwrite the  
assigned picture. -or-  
1 Scroll to or select the picture you want to send  
with Bluetooth.  
130  
 
Media Center  
Press A under No to return to the list of entries  
To to fast forward, scroll right. To rewind, scroll left.  
The longer you hold the scroll key, the faster the  
video fast forwards or rewinds.  
without overwriting the assigned picture.  
Setting as Wallpaper  
1 Scroll to or select the picture you want to set as  
wallpaper.  
Sending in a Message  
1 Scroll to or select the video you want to include  
in a message.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Set As Wallpaper.  
2 Press A under Send.  
3 Create and send the message. The picture you  
selected is automatically included as an  
attachment.  
Videos  
The Media Center lets you play videos and send  
them in MMS messages.  
Audio Recordings  
The Media Center lets you play audio recordings,  
send them in MMS messages, and assign them to  
Contacts entries.  
Playing  
To play a video, select it from the list of items in the  
Media Center.  
This icon V appears next to each video in the list of  
items.  
Playing  
To play an audio recording, select it from the list of  
items in the Media Center.  
Tip: When viewing the list of items in the Media  
Center, you can scroll left or right, or press  
* or #, to change the type of media that  
is displayed in the list.  
This icon a appears next to each audio recording  
in the list of items.  
Tip: When viewing the list of items in the Media  
Center, you can scroll left or right, or press  
* or #, to change the type of media that  
is displayed in the list.  
To stop the video before it has finished playing,  
press O or scroll down.  
To restart the video, press O.  
131  
             
Renaming Items  
To stop the audio recording before it has finished  
playing, press O or scroll down.  
Note: You cannot assign a voice record as the  
ring tone for a Contacts entry.  
To restart the audio recording, press O.  
Renaming Items  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Scroll to or select the item you want to rename.  
3 Press m.  
To to fast forward, scroll right. To rewind, scroll left.  
The longer you hold the scroll key, the faster the  
audio recording fast forwards or rewinds.  
When you play an audio recording, an animated  
image appears on the display.  
4 Select Rename.  
5 Delete the item’s name and enter a new name.  
6 Press O.  
Sending in a Message  
1 Scroll to or select the audio recording you want  
to include in a message.  
Locking Items  
When you lock an item in the Media Center, it  
cannot be deleted until you unlock it.  
2 Press A under Send.  
3 Create and send the message. The audio  
recording you selected is automatically included  
as an attachment.  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Scroll to or select the item you want to lock or  
unlock.  
Assigning to Contacts  
To assign an audio recording in the Media Center  
as the ring tone for a Contacts entry:  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Lock to lock the item. -or-  
1 Scroll to or select the audio recording you want  
Select Unlock to unlock the item.  
to assign.  
When you view items in the Media Center, one of  
these icons appears next to each locked item:  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Assign As Ringer.  
4 Select the Contacts entry you want to assign the  
ring tone to.  
Locked.  
R
Forward lock and locked.  
c
132  
       
Media Center  
3 Select Delete All.  
4 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
Deleting Items  
Deleting items from the Media Center means they  
can no longer be accessed anywhere in your  
phone, including the list of ringtones, the list of  
voice records, and Contacts.  
Copying and Moving Items  
If you have the memory card in your phone, you  
can copy and move items in the Media Center from  
your phone’s memory to the memory card or from  
the memory card to your phone’s memory.  
Under certain conditions, some DRM vendors will  
not charge you if you download an item multiple  
times within a given time frame. Please contact the  
DRM vendor to learn more about their download  
regulations.  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Scroll to or select the item you want to move.  
3 Press m.  
4 To copy the item, select Copy To Phone or  
Copy To Card. -or-  
Deleting an Item  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Scroll to or select the item you want to delete.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete.  
5 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
To move the item, select Move To Phone or  
Move To Card.  
Some items cannot be copied or moved:  
•
DRM pictures and ring tones cannot be copied.  
Some DRM pictures and ring tones cannot be  
moved, depending on their rights settings.  
Deleting All Items  
You can delete all unlocked items currently in view,  
depending on how Media Center filtering is set.  
See “Filtering by Media Type” on page 127. If  
filtering is set to show all types of Media Center  
items, all unlocked items are deleted.  
•
•
Forward locked pictures and ring tones cannot  
be copied or moved to the memory card.  
Videos over 30 seconds long cannot be copied  
or moved to your phone’s memory.  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Press m.  
133  
         
Changing Storage Preference  
If you try to copy or move an item that cannot be  
copied or moved, your phone displays a message  
telling you that this action cannot be performed.  
To access the audio player from the Media Center:  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 To view the audio recordings on your memory  
card, press m. Select Filter > Card: Audio.  
Changing Storage Preference  
While you are using the Media Center, you can  
choose whether media items are saved to your  
phone’s memory or to the memory card.  
3 Select [Audio Player] Play Audio Files. -or-  
Press A under Player.  
Accessing the Camera  
1 Access the Media Center.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Memory Card > Store Media.  
4 Select On Phone to set your phone to save  
media items to the phone’s memory. -or-  
To access the camera from the Media Center at  
any time, press c.  
You can also select [Camera] from the list of items  
or press A under Camera when these options  
appear.  
Select Prefer On Card to set your phone to  
save media items to the memory card if it is in  
the phone. If the memory card is not in the  
phone, even if you choose Prefer On Card, the  
media items are saved to your phone’s memory.  
Managing Memory  
To view your used memory, free memory, and  
memory capacity of your phone and the memory  
card:  
The location that you choose becomes the Store  
Media option in Settings.  
1 Access the Media Center. -or-  
Scroll to or select any item in the Media Center.  
Accessing the Audio Player  
Your i875 phone includes an audio player that you  
can use to play MP3 audio files stored on the  
memory card inserted in your phone.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Memory Usage.  
To free memory, delete or move items.  
134  
               
Media Center  
Note: Items accessible through the Media  
Center that are stored in your phone’s  
memory use the same memory space  
used to store messages, Java application  
data, and voice records created when  
your phone is in a call. Deleting some of  
these other items frees memory.  
135  
Note: If you request equipment-related  
transactions on your account, BoostTM  
Customer Care may require you to  
provide specific information about your  
phone. By pressing m anytime while in My  
Info, a submenu will appear that includes  
your phone's service status, unit  
My Info  
My Info lets you view information about your phone  
and send this information to other phones.  
Viewing My Info  
1 From the main menu, select My Info.  
2 Scroll to see the entire screen.  
information, and phone identification  
numbers including IMEI, SIM ID, and  
Serial Number (SN). Please be prepared  
to supply the representative with this  
information when requesting these types  
of transactions.  
The My Info screen contains:  
•
•
My Name — You can enter your name here.  
Line 1 — your phone numbers for phone line 1.  
Each number appears when you receive your  
first call on that line.  
Editing My Info  
To edit My Info to enter or change the text that  
•
Walkie-Talkie # — Your BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
number is the number that others use to contact  
you using BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls. This  
number appears when you receive your first  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call.  
appears in My Name:  
1 From the main menu, select My Info.  
2 Press A under Edit.  
3 Select Name.  
4 Enter the name you want to appear. See  
“Entering Text” on page 55. When you are  
finished, press O.  
•
•
Carrier IP — the IP address assigned to Boost  
Mobile®. This number appears when you  
register for packet data services.  
IP1 Address and IP2 Address — the IP  
addresses you use to access the Internet with  
your phone.  
You can also edit the information in Line 1, but  
your changes are only temporary. The next time  
your phone registers on the network, your actual  
phone number will reappear in My Info.  
136  
             
My Info  
Automatic Sending  
To control whether your information is sent  
automatically:  
Setting Sending Options  
Your phone can send information in My Info to  
other phones that have this capability.  
1 From the main menu, select My Info.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Send My Info Setup > Auto Send.  
4 To set your information to be sent automatically,  
set this option to On. -or-  
You can control what portion of the information in  
My Info is sent and whether it is sent automatically  
in every BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call or only when  
you choose to send it.  
Information Sent  
To set your information to be sent only when you  
choose to send it, set this option to Off.  
The information your phone sends always includes  
My Name and BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number.  
Note: When you receive your phone, it is set to  
It may include Line 1 and Carrier IP, depending  
on how you set your sending options.  
send your information automatically.  
The default setting is Line 1 only.  
To change which fields are sent:  
1 From the main menu, select My Info.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Send My Info Setup > Info to Send.  
4 A checkmark appears next to the fields that will  
be sent. To add or remove the checkmark, select  
the field.  
5 When you are finished, press A under Done.  
137  
     
Taking a Picture to Send  
Using Walkie-Talkie Send  
Note: For more information on taking pictures,  
Walkie-Talkie Send lets you exchange pictures, My  
Info, and contact information with other phones  
that have this capability. You do this through  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls.  
see “Taking Pictures” on page 118.  
1 While in a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call, press A  
under Camera.  
2 When the picture you want to capture is in view,  
press O or press A under Capture.  
3 To save the picture so you can send it, press O  
or press A under Save. -or-  
Sending a Picture  
When you send a picture using Walkie-Talkie  
Send, the picture you sent appears on the display  
of the phone you are engaged in the Walkie-Talkie  
call with, is saved by that phone, and then is  
accessible through that phone’s Media Center.  
To discard the picture without sending it, press  
A under Discard. Repeat step 2 until you  
capture a picture you want to send.  
4 Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button to send  
the picture.  
Sending a Picture During a Call  
You can send a picture at any time during a  
Walkie-Talkie call, whether you made or received  
the call*.  
5 Wait while the picture is transmitted. The  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call is temporarily  
interrupted while a picture is transmitted.  
6 When prompted, press the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie button to resume the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie call.  
* Additional charges may apply.  
You cannot talk or listen on a BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie call while a picture is being  
transmitted. Other activities, such as taking or  
searching for a picture, do not prevent you from  
talking or listening.  
Sending a Stored Picture  
1 While in a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call: Press m.  
Select Browse Pictures.  
A list of pictures that can be included in a  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call appears.  
138  
       
Using Walkie-Talkie Send  
2 Select the picture you want to send.  
Accepting a Picture  
1 When you see the message asking you if you  
want to accept the picture, press A under Yes.  
2 Wait while the picture is transmitted. The  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call is temporarily  
interrupted while a picture is transmitted.  
3 When prompted, press the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie button to resume the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie call.  
3 Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button to send  
the picture.  
4 Wait while the picture is transmitted. The  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call is temporarily  
interrupted while a picture is transmitted.  
5 When prompted, press the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie button to resume the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie call.  
Tip: If you want to stop the transmission before it  
Receiving a Picture  
is finished, press A under Cancel.  
When someone sends you a picture using  
Walkie-Talkie Send, your phone emits a tone or  
vibrates and a message appears on the display  
asking you if you want to accept the picture.  
Declining a Picture  
When you see the message asking you if you  
want to accept the picture, press A under No.  
Pictures you receive are saved to your phone’s  
memory or to the memory card inserted in your  
phone, depending on the storage preference you  
chose, and are then accessible through the Media  
Center.  
The picture is not transmitted.  
Clearing a Picture From The Display  
If you want to remove a picture from your phone’s  
display while still in the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call  
in which you received it or while in a subsequent  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call with the person who  
sent it:  
When you receive a picture, it appears every time  
you are in a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call with the  
person who sent it unless you delete the picture  
from the Media Center. This occurs for the last 20  
people who sent you pictures.  
1 Press m.  
2 Select Clear Screen.  
139  
   
Sending My Info and Contact Information  
This does not delete the picture from your phone’s  
Media Center. The picture will appear on the  
display again the next time you receive a BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie call from the person who sent it.  
Sending My Info  
You can control what portion of the information in  
My Info is sent and whether it is sent automatically  
in every BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call or only when  
you choose to send it. See “Setting Sending  
Options” on page 137.  
Setting Picture Capability  
To turn your phone’s ability to send and receive  
pictures in BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls on or off:  
Tip: When you send My Info, certain  
information, such as your email address or  
fax number, cannot be included. To send  
complete contact information, create an  
entry for yourself in Contacts and send it.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > WT  
Options > WT Send Picture.  
2 Select On or Off.  
This setting does not affect your phone’s ability to  
send and receive My Info or contact information.  
Sending Information During a Call  
1 While in a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call, press m.  
2 With WT Send My Info highlighted, press O.  
Sending My Info and Contact  
Information  
3 Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button to send  
the information.  
When you send My Info or contact information  
using Walkie-Talkie Send, the information you sent  
appears on the display of the phone you are  
engaged in the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call with.  
After the call, the information appears on the recent  
call list of that phone.  
Starting a Call by Sending Information  
1 From the main menu, select My Info.  
2 Press m.  
3 With WT Send My Info highlighted, press O.  
4 Use the keypad to enter the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number you want to send the  
information to. -or-  
140  
       
Using Walkie-Talkie Send  
Press A under Browse. Select Contacts,  
Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you  
want to enter.  
Starting a Call by Sending Information  
1 From Contacts or the recent calls list scroll to or  
select the entry you want to send.  
5 When Ready to Send appears on the display,  
press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button to send  
the information.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select WT Send Contact.  
4 Use the keypad to enter the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number you want to send. -or-  
Sending Contact Information  
Press A under Browse. Select Contacts,  
Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you  
want to enter.  
You can send contact information by selecting a  
Contacts entry or an item from the recent calls list.  
Contacts entries that contain only addresses  
cannot be sent. When Contacts entries are  
received, they do not include ring tones or pictures.  
5 When Ready to Send appears on the display,  
press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button to send  
the information.  
These items from the recent calls list can be sent:  
Receiving My Info or Contact  
Information  
When you receive My Info or contact information  
from another phone, an icon appears on the  
display:  
•
•
Contact information sent from other phones  
Calls to or from numbers stored in your Contacts  
list  
Sending Information During a Call  
1 While in a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call, press m.  
2 Select Contacts or Recent Calls.  
3 Scroll to the Contacts entry or item in the recent  
My Info.  
j
d
Contact information.  
calls list you want to send.  
4 When Ready to Send appears on the display,  
press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button to send  
the information.  
141  
   
Sending My Info and Contact Information  
To view the information while still in the  
Walkie-Talkie call:  
1 Press m.  
2 Select View Contact.  
You can also view My Info from other phones on  
the recent calls list. See “Recent Calls” on page 50.  
142  
Bluetooth®  
Understanding Bluetooth®  
Access Settings  
A Bluetooth device can have either automatic or  
ask security access. The first time a Bluetooth  
device connects to your i875 phone, you must  
grant the device permission to connect. You can  
then change the access setting of the device to  
either automatic or ask.  
Bluetooth®  
Your i875 phone is a Bluetooth device. Bluetooth  
devices create seamless voice and data  
connections with other Bluetooth devices, such as  
another Bluetooth phone, a Bluetooth pen,  
headset, or desktop adapter. These connections  
are made wirelessly.  
You can use your i875 phone to send information  
such as Contacts entries, Datebook events, and  
pictures to another Bluetooth device.  
If you set a device to automatic, then that device  
can connect automatically to your phone when it is  
in range. If you set a device to ask, then that device  
must request permission before it can connect to  
your phone.  
Devices must be within 32 feet (10 meters) of your  
phone to be recognized.  
Note: This measurement represents optimal  
conditions. Actual conditions may require  
you to position your phone closer.  
Devices are automatically granted permission  
during the 10 seconds after bonding. For more  
information about bonding, see “Bluetooth®  
Bonds” on page 146.  
You can only connect your phone to one device at  
a time.  
The default for hands free devices, such as  
Bluetooth headsets, is automatic.  
143  
         
Setting Your Phone for Bluetooth®  
Renaming Your Phone  
Setting Your Phone for  
Bluetooth®  
Bluetooth devices are listed by their Bluetooth  
addresses unless you name them. Your i875  
phone comes with a default device name of  
“Motorola Phone”. Renaming your i875 phone with  
a unique device name makes it easier for you to  
distinguish your phone from other Bluetooth  
devices.  
You can configure the following aspects of  
Bluetooth:  
•
•
•
•
Power  
Device name  
Voice recognition and dialing  
Find Me duration  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth > Setup  
> Name.  
2 Enter the name you want for your phone.  
3 Press O.  
Turning Bluetooth® On or Off  
You can turn power to your phone’s Bluetooth  
feature on or off. While Bluetooth power is on, your  
phone can communicate with other devices.  
Setting Voice Dialing  
Some Bluetooth devices use voice dialing. When  
you receive your phone, Bluetooth voice dialing is  
turned off.  
You can turn off Bluetooth if you want to prolong  
battery life or you enter an area where Bluetooth is  
prohibited.  
To activate voice dialing for Bluetooth:  
The default setting is Off.  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth > Setup  
> Voice Dial.  
2 Select the setting you want.  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth > Setup  
> Power.  
2 Select the setting you want.  
144  
         
Bluetooth®  
Making a Bluetooth®  
Connection  
The following sections cover how to connect your  
phone to another Bluetooth device.  
Setting a Find Me Duration  
You can change how long your phone remains  
discoverable to other devices. The default duration  
is 1 minute. See “Sharing Your Phone’s  
Bluetooth® Address” on page 145.  
Note: Some Bluetooth devices only have full  
functionality when DTMF dialing is set to  
On. See “Phone Calls Features” on  
page 182.  
To select a default duration for Find Me:  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth > Setup  
> Find Me Duration.  
2 Select the setting you want.  
Sharing Your Phone’s Bluetooth®  
Address  
To bond with your phone, devices must have your  
phone’s Bluetooth address. To find devices that  
you want to bond with, you can make your phone  
discoverable, so that other devices learn your  
phone’s Bluetooth address. You can also have  
your phone search for Bluetooth devices to learn  
their addresses.  
Accessing Bluetooth®  
From the main menu, select Bluetooth. -or-  
While in a call, press m. Select Use Bluetooth.  
Note: If Bluetooth power is set to Off on your  
phone, you will be prompted to  
temporarily turn power on in order to use  
Bluetooth.  
Allowing Bluetooth® Devices to Find Your  
Phone  
To let devices find your phone and its Bluetooth  
address, place your phone in discoverable mode.  
145  
               
Making a Bluetooth® Connection  
Discoverable mode lasts for the duration selected  
under Find Me Duration in the Bluetooth Setup  
menu. During this time, other devices that are  
within range can detect your phone. You can then  
choose to grant or deny each device’s request to  
bond.  
Bluetooth® Bonds  
A bond is an encryption key that is generated when  
two Bluetooth devices exchange a common PIN.  
This key verifies the identity of each device, and  
encrypts any data transferred between the devices.  
Once the PIN is exchanged, the devices do not  
have to be in discoverable mode in order to  
exchange information. You only need to create a  
bond once between two devices.  
Note: You must grant the device’s request in  
order to receive information from the  
device on your phone.  
To start discoverable mode, from the main  
menu, select Bluetooth > Find Me.  
Discovering Bluetooth® Devices  
If you search for devices and you select a device  
that you are currently bonded with from the list of  
found devices, then the current bond with that  
device will be voided. You will have to re-establish  
the bond.  
To have your phone search for Bluetooth devices:  
From the main menu, select Bluetooth > Hands  
Free > [Find Devices].  
Your i875 requires that you create a bond in order  
to connect with another device. However, you can  
choose to establish bonds with devices without  
connecting.  
A list of hands free devices displays. Devices  
that do not have a name are listed by their  
Bluetooth address.  
Note: Devices are automatically granted  
permission during the 10 seconds after  
bonding.  
To stop the search and go to the list of found  
devices, press A under Stop.  
To stop the search and return to the previous  
screen, press A under Cancel.  
Bluetooth® PINs  
Bluetooth devices exchange PINs in order to  
establish encrypted transfers between them. When  
prompted, enter the Bluetooth PINs.  
146  
         
Bluetooth®  
Some Bluetooth devices ship with Bluetooth PINs.  
Please refer to your Bluetooth device’s user guide  
to locate this information.  
Connecting to a Stored Device  
If you have previously connected to a device, the  
device will be stored on your phone so you can  
connect with it easily.  
If a device ships without a Bluetooth PIN, then you  
can enter any PIN for that device. To establish a  
connection to that device, enter the same PIN for  
both your phone and the device. For example, if  
you enter 1234 as the device’s PIN, then enter  
1234 as your phone’s PIN.  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth > Hands  
Free.  
2 Select the device you want to connect to.  
3 If prompted whether you want to bond with the  
device, press A under Yes.  
4 If prompted, enter the Bluetooth PIN.  
To create a bond between your phone and another  
device:  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth.  
Your phone will connect to the device.  
2 If you want to create a bond and connect with  
the given device, select Hands Free > [Find  
Devices]. -or-  
Using Bluetooth® During a Call  
During a call, you can connect with available  
Bluetooth devices.  
If you want to create a bond to have it available  
for future use, select Link to Devices.  
Note: If the Hands Free menu contains only one  
device, then your phone will automatically  
try to connect to that device.  
3 Select the device you want.  
4 Press A under Yes if you are prompted to do  
so.  
1 While in a call, press m. Select Use Bluetooth.  
5 Enter a PIN.  
2 Select the device you want to connect to.  
6 Press A under OK.  
7 If necessary, enter the same PIN for the other  
device.  
8 Select Bond if you are prompted to do so.  
147  
 
Setting Device Details  
Disconnecting from a Device  
Viewing Device Details  
To disconnect from a device:  
To view the name and the access setting of a  
device:  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth >  
Hands Free.  
2 Press A under Drop.  
Note: Pressing A under No when prompted  
exits the menu without disconnecting the  
device.  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth >  
Device History.  
2 Select the device you want.  
Editing Device Names  
You can edit a device name so the device is easier  
to identify.  
3 Press A under Yes.  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth >  
Setting Device Details  
The device history stores a list of up to 20 devices  
that have connected with your phone.  
Device History.  
2 Scroll to the device you want to rename.  
3 Press A under Edit or press O.  
4 Select Name.  
To view the device history, from the main menu,  
select Bluetooth > Device History.  
5 Enter the new name.  
From the device history, you can:  
Note: A device name can have a maximum of  
•
•
•
Edit device names  
Change device access settings  
Delete devices  
40 characters.  
6 Press O.  
Editing Device Access Settings  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth >  
Device History.  
Note: If you delete a device from device history,  
you will have to find the device to connect  
with it. See “Discovering Bluetooth®  
Devices” on page 146.  
2 Scroll to the device you want to set access for.  
3 Press A under Edit or press O.  
148  
             
Bluetooth®  
4 Select Access.  
5 Select the setting you want.  
Search for the device you want to transfer to by  
selecting [Find Devices].  
7 If prompted, bond with the device.  
Deleting Devices  
1 From the main menu, select Bluetooth >  
Device History.  
Your phone connects to the device and transfers  
the contact.  
2 Scroll to the device you want to delete.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete.  
Sending Datebook Events  
1 From the main menu, select Datebook.  
2 Highlight the event you want to send.  
3 Press m.  
5 To delete the device, press O.  
4 Select Transfer.  
Sending Contacts, Datebook  
Events and Pictures  
Bluetooth lets you send Contact entries, Datebook  
events, or pictures you have stored in the Media  
Center to connected devices.  
5 If the event you select repeats, then you will be  
prompted to choose whether to send the  
selected instance of the event or all instances of  
the event.  
To send only the selected instance of the event,  
select This Event Only. -or-  
Sending Contacts  
To send all instances of the event, select  
Repeat Events.  
1 From the main menu, select Contacts.  
2 Highlight the contact you want to send.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Transfer.  
5 Select Bluetooth.  
6 Select Bluetooth.  
7 Select the device you want to transfer to. -or-  
Search for the device you want to transfer to by  
selecting [Find Devices].  
6 Select the device you want to transfer to. -or-  
149  
       
Receiving Items  
8 If prompted, bond with the device.  
Canceling Transfers  
You can cancel a transfer while the transfer is in  
progress.  
Your phone connects to the device and transfers  
the event.  
Note: If a transfer is interrupted, the  
Sending Pictures  
Connection Failed prompt displays.  
Note: You can only send pictures if they are not  
1 Press A under Cancel.  
forward locked.  
2 Press A under Yes to cancel. -or-  
1 From the main menu, select Media Center.  
2 Highlight the picture you want to send.  
3 Press m.  
Press A under No to continue with the transfer.  
Tip: If you close the flip while transferring an  
item, you will end the transfer.  
4 Select Transfer.  
5 Select Bluetooth.  
6 Select the device you want to transfer to. -or-  
Viewing and Storing Received Items  
After an incoming transfer is complete, your phone  
translates the item. The item appears on your  
phone’s display. You can choose to either store or  
discard the item. Items are stored as follows:  
Search for the device you want to transfer to by  
selecting [Find Devices].  
7 If prompted, bond with the device.  
•
•
Contact entries to Contacts  
Pictures saved to the location selected for the  
Store Media setting  
Your phone connects to the device and transfers  
the picture.  
Receiving Items  
•
Datebook events to Datebook  
You receive a prompt when your phone has an  
incoming transfer. You must either accept or reject  
the transfer.  
To store the item, press A under Store or  
press O. -or-  
To discard an item without saving it, press A  
under Discard.  
150  
         
Filtering by Voice Record Type  
Voice Records  
You can set your phone to show all voice records,  
only voice records created when your phone was in  
a call, or only voice records created when your  
phone was not in a call.  
A voice record is a recording you make with your  
phone and can play back. You can record notes to  
yourself when your phone is not in a call or record  
phone calls when your phone is in a call.  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Filter.  
Voice records created when your phone is not in a  
call can be accessed through the Media Center  
and sent in MMS messages. See “Media Center”  
on page 126 and “Multi-Media Messages” on page  
86.  
4 Select the option you want:  
•
•
All — show all voice records.  
In Call — show only voice records created  
when your phone was in a call.  
Viewing Voice Records  
To view your list of voice records:  
•
Standard — show only voice records created  
when your phone was not in a call.  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Scroll to view more voice records.  
Tip: You can also press * or # to scroll  
through these options while viewing the list  
of voice records.  
Voice Records Icons  
One of these icons appears next to each voice  
record:  
Creating Voice Records  
Phone Not in a Call  
To record a note to yourself:  
A voice record made while your phone was  
not in a call.  
c
A voice record made while your phone was in  
a call.  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord >  
[New VoiceRec].  
v
151  
             
Playing Voice Records  
2 Say the message you want to record into the  
microphone.  
Labeling Voice Records  
When you create a voice record, it is labeled with  
the date it was recorded. You can then rename it  
with a custom label.  
3 When you are finished recording, press O.  
Phone in a Call  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Scroll to the voice record you want to label.  
3 Press A under Label.  
4 Enter the label you want to assign. See  
“Entering Text” on page 55.  
To record a phone call:  
1 While on an active call, press m.  
2 Select Record.  
3 To stop recording and discard the voice record  
at any time, press A under Cancel.  
5 Press O.  
4 When you are finished recording, press O.  
Note: Recording of phone calls is subject to  
applicable laws regarding privacy and  
recording of phone conversations.  
Locking Voice Records  
When you lock a voice record, it cannot be deleted  
until you unlock it.  
Playing Voice Records  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Scroll to the voice record you want to lock or  
unlock.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Lock to lock the message. -or-  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Select the voice record you want to play.  
3 To stop the voice record while it is playing, press  
O.  
Tip: To pause or resume, press any number key.  
Select Unlock to unlock the message.  
When a voice record is locked, this icon R appears  
next to it.  
152  
           
Voice Records  
2 With [New VoiceRec] highlighted, press A  
Deleting Voice Records  
Deleting a voice record from the voice record list  
deletes it from all parts of your phone, including the  
Media Center.  
under Memory. -or-  
With any voice record highlighted, press m.  
Select Memory.  
To free memory by deleting all unlocked voice  
records:  
Deleting a Voice Record  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Scroll to the unlocked voice record you want to  
delete.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete.  
5 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
1 From the voice records memory screen, press  
A under Delete.  
2 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
Note: Voice records are stored in your phone  
using the same memory space used to  
store messages, Java application data,  
and items accessible through the Media  
Center stored in your phone’s memory.  
Deleting or moving some of these other  
items frees memory for voice records.  
Deleting All Voice Records  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
2 Scroll to any voice record.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete All.  
5 Press O or A under Yes to confirm.  
Managing Memory  
To view the amount of memory available for voice  
records:  
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord.  
153  
       
Tip: If you do not hear the sounds associated  
with the Java application, select Settings >  
Volume and check the volumes of Java  
Speaker and Java Earpiece.  
Java® Applications  
Your phone arrives with Java applications loaded  
and ready to install. You can download and install  
more Java applications.  
Suspending Applications  
When you suspend an application, it does not stop  
running. It goes to the background so that you can  
run another application in the foreground.  
To download and install more Java applications, go  
to the BoostLIVE menu option on your phone or  
visit www.boostmobile.com.  
Note: Using Java applications may cause your  
phone to use up more battery power than  
other uses of your phone.  
To suspend an application:  
Press e or close the flip.  
To view your suspended applications:  
From the Java menu, select Suspended Apps.  
Running Applications  
To run an application that has a shortcut on the  
main menu:  
You can have up to 3 applications running at one  
time — 1 running in the foreground and 2 in the  
background.  
1 From the main menu, select the application or  
suite of applications you want to run.  
2 If you have selected a suite of applications,  
Resuming Applications  
You can resume a suspended application at any  
time. This brings it to the foreground.  
select the application you want to run.  
To run an application that does not have a shortcut  
on the main menu:  
1 From the Java menu, select Suspended Apps.  
2 Select the application you want to resume.  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
2 Select the application or suite of applications  
you want to run.  
3 If you have selected a suite of applications,  
select the application you want to run.  
154  
         
Java® Applications  
Ending Applications  
Downloading Applications  
To end an application:  
If you want to run more Java applications, you can  
download them into your phone.  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
2 If the application you want to end is part of a  
suite of applications, select the suite.  
Check the BoostLIVE menu option on your phone  
for a catalog of items available for purchase and  
download.  
3 Scroll to the application you want to end.  
You can also go to www.boostmobile.com for a  
selection of Java applications and downloading  
instructions.  
Press A under End. -or-  
If End is not one of your options: Press m.  
Select End.  
Deleting Applications  
Tip: You can also end applications from the  
Suspended Apps screen.  
Note: Under certain conditions, some DRM  
vendors will not charge you if you  
download an item multiple times within a  
given time frame. Please contact the DRM  
vendor to learn more about their  
4 Press A under End.  
To end all applications:  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
2 Scroll to Suspended Apps.  
3 Press m.  
download regulations.  
To delete an application:  
4 Select End All.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
6 If you want to end all applications without letting  
them exit, press A under EndNow.  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
2 Scroll to the application you want to delete.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Deinstall.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Tip: You can also end applications from the  
Suspended Apps screen.  
6 When your phone has finished deleting the  
application, press A under Done.  
155  
         
Managing Memory  
To delete all Java applications:  
Shortcuts on the Main Menu  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
2 Scroll to Java System.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete All.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
When you install an application, you can create a  
shortcut to the application on the main menu.  
To create a shortcut to an application that is  
already installed:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Personalize > Menu Options > Add/Remove  
Apps. -or-  
Managing Memory  
To view the amount of memory available for Java  
applications:  
From the main menu: Press m. Select Main  
Menu Setup > Add/Remove Apps.  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps > Java  
2 Scroll to view the list of Java applications. Any  
application that has a shortcut on the main menu  
has a checkmark next to it.  
3 Scroll to the application you want to create a  
shortcut for.  
4 Press O.  
5 Press A under Done.  
System.  
2 Press A under Next.  
3 To see more memory information, press A  
under Next again.  
Deleting Java applications frees memory.  
Note: Java application data is stored in your  
phone using the same memory space  
used to store messages, voice records,  
pictures, ringtones, and wallpaper  
To remove a shortcut:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Personalize > Menu Options > Add/Remove  
Apps. -or-  
images. Deleting some of these other  
items frees memory for Java applications.  
From the main menu: Press m. Select Main  
Menu Setup > Add/Remove Apps.  
156  
     
Java® Applications  
2 Scroll to view the list of Java applications. Any  
application that has a shortcut on the main menu  
has a checkmark next to it.  
3 Scroll to the application you want to remove the  
shortcut for.  
•
Restricted — No Java or similar software  
applications may access the location of your  
phone. However, location information may still  
be available to the phone’s owner, fleet  
manager, or account administrator.  
•
•
Unrestricted — All Java applications may  
access the location of your phone, without  
notifying you.  
By Permission — When a Java application  
attempts to access the location of your phone,  
you are prompted to give permission. However,  
location information may still be available to the  
phone’s owner, fleet manager, or account  
administrator.  
4 Press O.  
5 Press A under Done.  
Java Applications and GPS  
Enabled  
Some Java applications can make use of your  
phone’s GPS feature to determine the approximate  
geographical location of your phone. (See “GPS  
(Global Positioning System) Enabled” on page 164  
for more information on the GPS feature.)  
However, for privacy reasons, you may not always  
want Java applications to access the location of  
your phone. Your phone protects your privacy by  
giving you the option to block all or some Java  
applications from accessing the location of your  
phone.  
See “Setting Privacy Options” on page 170 for  
information on choosing these options.  
Granting or Denying Permission  
If you choose By Permission, you must grant or  
deny each Java application access to the location  
of your phone when the application requests  
access for the first time. You may be required to  
grant or deny subsequent requests from the same  
application, depending on the privacy setting you  
choose for the individual Java application (see  
“Setting Privacy for Each Java Application” on  
page 158).  
Setting Privacy for All Java  
Applications  
These options control the privacy of all Java  
applications on your phone:  
157  
   
Java Applications and GPS Enabled  
When a Java application requests access to the  
location of your phone, a screen appears informing  
you.  
•
•
For this session — If the application  
requests access to the location of your phone  
again before you power off your phone, the  
request is granted without notifying you.  
To deny this request:  
Only Once — If the application requests  
access to the location of your phone again,  
you are prompted to grant or deny  
permission.  
1 Press A under Deny. The application does not  
access the location of your phone.  
2 Select the denying option you want:  
•
Always — If the application requests access  
to the location of your phone again, the  
request is denied without notifying you.  
Setting Privacy for Each Java  
Application  
After a given Java application requests access to  
the location of your phone for the first time, you  
have the opportunity to set the GPS privacy  
options for that Java application.  
•
For this session — If the application  
requests access to the location of your phone  
again before you power off your phone, the  
request is denied without notifying you.  
• Only Once — If the application requests  
access to the location of your phone again,  
you are prompted to grant or deny  
permission.  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
2 Scroll to the application or suite of applications  
you want to set the privacy options for.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Permissions.  
5 Select the privacy options you want for this  
application:  
To grant this request:  
1 Press A under Grant. The application  
accesses your phone’s location.  
2 Select the granting option you want:  
•
Always — The application always has  
permission to access the location of your  
phone, without notifying you.  
•
Always — If the application requests access  
to the location of your phone again, the  
request is granted without notifying you.  
158  
 
Java® Applications  
•
Ask — When the application requests access  
to the location of your phone, you are  
prompted to grant or deny permission (see  
“Granting or Denying Permission” on page  
157).  
•
Never — When the application requests  
access to the location of your phone, the  
request is denied without notifying you.  
159  
Installing Applications  
2 Select the application or suite of applications  
Digital Rights  
Management  
you want to install.  
Installation messages appear as the application  
installs.  
When you download multimedia content available  
online, such as audio, images, or Java  
3 If you want to create a shortcut to the Java  
application on the main menu: Press A under  
Next. Press A under Yes. Press O.  
applications, these items may be subject to DRM  
restrictions. DRM, or digital rights management, is  
a system that defines how copyrighted multimedia  
content can be distributed and used.  
4 Press A under Done.  
To send the DRM installation to the background,  
press e.  
DRM sets items to time-based or count-based  
usage settings. Time-based settings let you use  
the given item for a specified interval. Examples of  
time-based settings include being able to use an  
item for a specified number of days from the date  
of purchase, a specified number of days from the  
date that the item is first used, or a specified  
number of minutes. Count-based settings let you  
use an item for a specified number of times after  
you download it or for unlimited use.  
Understanding DRM Status  
Icons  
Depending on how a given third-party vendor has  
set rights for an item, the item may include the  
following status icons:  
c
e
The item is a DRM item.  
Installing Applications  
The DRM item has expired.  
Except for DRM Java applications, DRM items will  
automatically install once they have finished  
downloading.  
As with other items in Media Center, you can lock  
DRM items. See “Locking Items” on page 132.  
Note: All DRM items are forward locked. See  
To install DRM Java applications:  
“Forward Locked Items” on page 128.  
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps.  
160  
                 
Digital Rights Management  
If the person you want to send the item to is not  
in Contacts, select [New Number]. Enter the  
number.  
Sharing Items  
You can gift a DRM item to a friend’s phone. Gifting  
is when you purchase a copy of a DRM item and  
send it to someone. If you do not want to gift an  
item, you can send a message to a friend’s phone  
that contains the link for purchasing the item. The  
friend can then purchase the item quickly and  
easily. Sending this type of message is called  
Tell-A-Friend.  
6 Press O.  
7 Follow the vendor’s instructions for purchasing  
an additional license.  
Tell-A-Friend  
1 Go to the location on your phone that contains  
the item you want.  
2 Highlight the DRM item you want to tell your  
friend about.  
Gifting  
To check if a DRM item is giftable:  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Tell-A-Friend.  
1 Go to the location on your phone that contains  
the item you want.  
2 Highlight the DRM item you want to gift.  
The Create Message screen opens.  
3 Press m. If Gift is an option, the item is giftable.  
5 Complete and send the message. See “Creating  
and Sending Messages” on page 86.  
To gift a DRM item:  
1 Go to the location on your phone that contains  
Managing DRM Items  
Note: Depending on how the third-party vendor  
has set rights for the given DRM item, you  
may be unable to perform some of the  
following tasks.  
the item you want.  
2 Highlight the DRM item you want to gift.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Gift.  
5 Select the contact you want to send the item to.  
-or-  
161  
           
Managing DRM Items  
3 Press A under Renew or press m. Select  
Viewing License Information  
You can check a DRM item’s license to view the  
following information:  
Renew.  
4 Select the link to the page where you purchased  
the item.  
5 Follow the vendor’s instructions for purchasing  
an additional license.  
•
For time-based items, either the date and time  
the item is scheduled to expire, or the number of  
days left  
Deleting Items  
If you delete a DRM item that you purchased from  
Boost Mobile® from your phone, you will have to  
purchase it again to download it.  
•
•
For count-based items, the number of credits  
(uses) left or an unlimited use notice  
The name of the item’s vendor  
To view the license of a DRM item:  
Under certain conditions, third-party vendors will let  
you download an item multiple times within a given  
time frame, even if you deleted the item. Please  
contact the third-party vendor of an item to learn  
more about the vendor’s download regulations.  
1 Go to the location on your phone that contains  
the item you want.  
2 Highlight the DRM item you want to view license  
information for.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select License Info.  
To delete an item:  
1 Go to the location on your phone that contains  
the item you want.  
2 Highlight the DRM item you want to delete.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete.  
Renewing DRM Licenses  
Note: You can only renew DRM licenses if the  
license contains a link to the page where  
you purchased the item.  
5 If prompted, press A under Yes.  
1 Go to the location on your phone that contains  
the item you want.  
2 Highlight the DRM item you want to renew.  
162  
     
Digital Rights Management  
About Expired Items  
If you are using an item when it expires, once you  
finish your session with the item, you will be unable  
to use the item.  
When ring tones and wallpapers expire, they are  
automatically removed from their respective lists.  
For expired items that continue to display in their  
respective lists, you can either choose to renew the  
license for the item or else manually delete the  
item.  
Note: You cannot delete locked items.  
163  
 
You can also use the GPS feature to view your  
approximate location. Location information  
appears on the phone’s display.  
GPS (Global Positioning  
System) Enabled  
Java applications loaded on your phone can also  
request your location. If your phone is connected to  
a laptop computer or similar device, software  
running on that device can request your location.  
To protect your privacy, you can control whether  
these requests are granted.  
Your phone’s GPS Enabled feature uses  
information from Global Positioning System (GPS)  
satellites orbiting the Earth to determine the  
approximate geographical location of your phone,  
expressed as latitude and longitude. The  
availability and accuracy of this location  
information (and the amount of time that it takes to  
calculate it) will vary depending on the environment  
in which you are using the GPS feature. For  
example, GPS location fixes are often difficult to  
obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high  
buildings, or in other situations where you have not  
established a clear broad view of the sky. Also,  
nearby radio and electronic equipment may block  
or interfere with reception from these distant  
satellites. SEE: “IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in  
Mind”.  
IMPORTANT: Things to Keep  
in Mind  
If you are using the GPS feature of your phone  
while driving, please give full attention to driving  
and to the road.  
Where adequate signals from multiple satellites  
are not available (usually because your GPS  
antenna cannot establish a view of a wide area of  
open sky), the GPS feature of your phone WILL  
NOT WORK. Such situations include but are  
not limited to:  
When you make a 911 emergency call, the GPS  
feature of your phone can help emergency  
personnel locate you if your phone has adequate  
access to GPS satellite signals and your  
emergency response center is equipped to process  
such information.  
•
•
In underground locations  
Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered  
vehicles  
•
Under any other metal or concrete roof or  
structure  
164  
         
GPS (Global Positioning System) Enabled  
•
Between tall buildings or under dense  
tree-cover  
Near a powerful radio or television tower  
Even where adequate signals from multiple  
satellites are available, your GPS feature will  
only provide an approximate location, often  
within 150 feet (45 meters) but sometimes  
much further from your actual location. Advice  
on how to improve GPS performance is  
provided in “Enhancing GPS Performance” on  
page 168.  
•
•
Some radios, entertainment equipment and  
other electronic devices may generate  
signals that can block or interfere with the  
GPS receiver ability to receive the distant  
satellite signals, particularly when such  
devices are operating in close proximity to  
the GPS receiver. Therefore, in a 911 call, or  
when otherwise using the GPS location  
function, always move your phone away  
from any such devices.  
When your GPS antenna is covered (for  
example, by your hand or other object) or  
facing the ground  
In temperature extremes outside the  
operating limits of your phone  
While the GPS feature of your phone can be a  
valuable navigational aid, it does not replace the  
need for careful navigating and good judgment.  
Never rely solely on one device for navigation.  
Remember that the accuracy of the location  
information and the time needed to obtain it will  
vary depending on circumstances, particularly the  
ability to receive signals from adequate numbers of  
satellites.  
•
•
On emergency calls, your phone uses assistance  
information from the phone network to improve the  
speed and accuracy of your phone’s location  
calculation: if such assistance information  
becomes unavailable, it may reduce the speed and  
accuracy of the location calculation.  
Walking or driving very slowly may also  
substantially reduce GPS performance.  
Even where location information can be  
calculated in such situations, it may take much  
longer to do so, and your location estimate may  
not be as accurate. Therefore, in any 911 call,  
always report the location to the emergency  
response center if you can and if you cannot,  
remain on your phone for as long as the  
emergency response center instructs you.  
165  
Making an Emergency Call  
The satellites used by the GPS feature of your  
phone are controlled by the U.S. government and  
are subject to changes implemented in accordance  
with the Department of Defense GPS user policy  
and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. These  
changes may affect the performance of the GPS  
feature of your phone.  
In some cases, your local 911 emergency  
response center may not be equipped to  
receive GPS location information. For this  
reason, and because the GPS location information  
reported is only approximate or may not be  
available in your location (see “IMPORTANT:  
Things to Keep in Mind” on page 164), always  
report your location to the 911 operator you  
speak to when making an emergency call, if able,  
just as you would when using a phone without GPS  
capabilities.  
Making an Emergency Call  
Dial 911 to be connected to an emergency  
response center. If you are on an active call, you  
must end it before calling 911.  
Note: If you are concerned about whether your  
local 911 emergency response center is  
equipped to receive GPS location  
When you make an emergency 911 call, the GPS  
feature of your phone begins to seek information to  
calculate your approximate location. It will take  
the GPS feature of your phone some time to  
determine your approximate location. Even  
where your phone has good access to sufficient  
GPS satellite signals and network assist data, it  
may take 30 seconds or more to determine the  
approximate location. This time will increase where  
there is reduced access to satellite signals. When  
your approximate location is determined, it is made  
available to the appropriate emergency response  
center.  
information, contact your local authorities.  
In general, if your phone has access to signals  
from more GPS satellites, your location will be  
determined faster and more accurately than if your  
phone has access to signals from fewer GPS  
satellites.  
If your phone does not have adequate access to  
GPS satellites signals, the location of the nearest  
cell tower in contact with your phone is  
automatically made available to the emergency  
response center, if the center has the capability to  
receive such information.  
166  
     
GPS (Global Positioning System) Enabled  
See “Enhancing GPS Performance” on page  
168 for information on how to help your phone  
determine your location.  
It may take your phone several minutes to  
complete the process of determining your location.  
During this time, a message usually appears on  
your phone’s display saying your phone is  
scanning for satellites. For tips on getting the best  
location calculation, see “Enhancing GPS  
Performance” on page 168.  
Viewing Your Approximate  
Location  
1 From the main menu, select GPS > Position.  
2 Scroll to view the entire screen.  
The Position screen displays the updated  
information.  
To cancel a location calculation before it is  
completed:  
This displays the following information about the  
last time your location was calculated:  
Press A under Cancel to return to the  
•
•
•
The time (as Greenwich Mean Time) and date  
that the location was last calculated  
The approximate location, expressed as latitude  
and longitude  
The estimated accuracy of the calculated  
location. This estimate of accuracy is only a very  
rough estimate and may vary substantially from  
the actual accuracy of the approximate location  
information reported.  
The number of satellites used to calculate the  
location. In general, more satellites make for  
better accuracy.  
Position screen. -or-  
Press e to return to the idle screen.  
Each time approximate location of your phone is  
calculated, the latest location information is stored  
in your phone and remains there even when your  
phone is powered off. You will see this information  
the next time you view the Position screen.  
If you received a phone call or alert while  
attempting to determine your location, the Position  
screen will disappear, but your phone will continue  
attempting to determine its location. If it is  
successful, the new location information will be  
displayed the next time you view the Position  
screen.  
•
To calculate your location again:  
Press A under Refresh.  
167  
   
Enhancing GPS Performance  
•
Hold your phone to enhance reception. Signals  
from GPS satellites are transmitted to your GPS  
antenna, which is in your phone antenna. Hold  
your phone away from your body, giving the  
antenna clear access to satellite signals. Do not  
cover the antenna area with your fingers or  
anything else.  
Enhancing GPS Performance  
Sometimes the GPS feature of your phone may be  
unable to complete a location calculation  
successfully. If this happens when you are making  
an emergency call, the location of the nearest cell  
tower in contact with your phone is made available  
to the appropriate emergency response center if  
the center has the capability to receive such  
information. If this happens when you are trying to  
view your location on the phone’s display, you will  
see a message indicating that your phone cannot  
access satellites.  
GPS antenna  
To improve accuracy and increase your chances of  
a successful calculation, do the following while  
your phone is determining your approximate  
location:  
•
Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best  
where there is nothing between your phone and  
a large amount of open sky. If possible, go  
outside, away from tall buildings and foliage.  
While performance in a building is improved by  
moving closer to windows, glass with certain sun  
shielding films may block satellite signals.  
•
Move away from electronic devices. Radios,  
entertainment devices, and other electronic  
devices may generate interfering signals that  
may prevent GPS receiver operation if they are  
in close proximity to the phone. Move your  
phone away from such devices when using the  
GPS-Enabled feature.  
•
Extend your phone antenna.  
168  
   
GPS (Global Positioning System) Enabled  
•
Stand still. If possible, stand still until your phone  
is finished determining your location. Moving  
your phone at a walking pace while your phone  
is calculating your approximate location may  
substantially decrease GPS performance.  
In a car. When using the GPS Enabled feature in  
a car, position your phone so that the GPS  
antenna has good access to GPS signals  
through the car’s windows. Typically, the GPS  
antenna has best access to GPS signals in a car  
when placed near a window.  
Updating Satellite Almanac  
Data  
Note: This feature may not be offered by Boost  
Mobile®.  
•
Another way to keep the GPS feature of your  
phone working well is to keep your satellite  
almanac data up to date.  
The United States government maintains an  
almanac of data about where GPS satellites are as  
they orbit the Earth. This information is available to  
your phone. Keeping your satellite almanac up to  
date helps your phone determine your location  
more quickly.  
Note: Although moving your phone at a walking  
pace decreases GPS performance,  
moving it at the speed of a moving car  
does not.  
The almanac contains information about the  
location of satellites, their operational status, and  
other satellite information. Keeping this information  
updated enhances the performance of your GPS  
feature. In most cases, your phone will be able to  
get a fix in strong satellite signal conditions with  
outdated almanac data, but it may take longer.  
•
Stay in network coverage. Depending on your  
service provider, the network will provide your  
phone with information that helps determine  
your location more quickly and accurately.  
Note: When you make an emergency call, your  
phone does not rely upon the almanac to  
determine your location.  
169  
   
Setting Privacy Options  
If your satellite almanac data is out of date, your  
phone may prompt you to update it. Follow the  
instructions that appear on the phone’s display.  
You may be asked to go to a web site or call a  
customer care number.  
•
•
Unrestricted — All applications may view the  
location of your phone, without notifying you.  
By Permission — When an application  
attempts to view the location of your phone,  
you will be prompted to give permission.  
However, location information may still be  
available to the phone’s owner, fleet manager,  
or account administrator.  
Setting Privacy Options  
Your phone’s GPS privacy options control whether  
Java applications on your phone or other software  
applications may view the location of your  
phone.You may set your phone to one of these  
GPS privacy options.  
Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature  
To prevent your GPS privacy settings from being  
altered without your knowledge, your GPS privacy  
option can be protected by a PIN.  
Note: Privacy options do not apply to the  
transmission of location information  
during emergency 911 calls.  
When you receive your phone, the GPS security  
feature is turned off, so you do not have to enter a  
GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy options. If  
you turn this feature on, you will be required to  
enter a GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy  
options.  
To set your GPS privacy options:  
1 From the main menu, select GPS > Privacy.  
2 If your GPS PIN security feature is enabled,  
enter your GPS PIN. (See “Setting the GPS PIN  
Security Feature” for more information.)  
To turn the GPS Enabled security feature on or off:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Security > GPS PIN.  
2 Select On or Off.  
3 Enter the current GPS PIN.  
3 Select the privacy option you want:  
• Restricted — No Java or similar software  
applications may view the location of your  
phone. However, location information may still  
be available to the phone’s owner, fleet  
manager, or account administrator.  
Note: When you receive your phone, your GPS  
PIN is 0000.  
4 Press A under Ok.  
170  
           
GPS (Global Positioning System) Enabled  
To change your GPS PIN:  
software, which displays your location on a map.  
Your phone provides an updated location every  
second and the map software displays your  
changing location on its map.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Security > Change Passwords > GPS PIN.  
2 Enter the current GPS PIN.  
See “Enhancing GPS Performance” on page  
168 for more details on obtaining good location  
information.  
Note: When you receive your phone, your GPS  
PIN is 0000.  
3 Press A under Ok.  
4 Enter the new 4- to 8-digit GPS PIN.  
5 Press A under Ok.  
6 Enter the new 4- to 8-digit GPS PIN to confirm.  
7 Press A under Ok.  
Note: Because your phone is continuously  
determining your location, using the GPS  
feature of your phone with map software  
uses the phone’s battery power quickly.  
Software Compatibility  
Your phone sends location information to your  
laptop or other device using the standard National  
Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) format.  
Your phone supports output messages in  
NMEA-0183 format and supports the following  
NMEA-0183 sentences: GGA, GLL, GSA, GSV,  
RMC, and VTG.  
Using GPS with Map Software  
You can use the GPS feature of your phone to  
provide approximate location data to a laptop  
computer or similar device that is running  
interactive map software such as that made by  
DeLorme or Microsoft. This way, if your phone has  
good access to GPS signals, your approximate  
position on a map can be made available as you  
travel in a vehicle.  
The map software running on your laptop or other  
device must support NMEA 3.0.  
To do this, connect your phone to your laptop (or  
other device) with a serial data cable, and set your  
phone to transmit data (see “Getting Started” on  
page 172). Your phone then provides your  
approximate location to the device running the map  
171  
   
Using GPS with Map Software  
Make sure the COM port settings of your laptop or  
other device are set to the following:  
Getting Started  
To connect your phone to your laptop or other  
device:  
•
•
•
•
•
Bits per second: 4800  
Data bits: 8  
Parity: None  
Stop bits: 1  
Flow control: Hardware  
1 Open the connector cover.  
connector  
cover  
To set your phone to send location information to  
your laptop or other device:  
1 From the main menu, select GPS > Interface.  
2 Set NMEA OUT to On.  
2 With the phone’s display facing up, insert the  
serial data cable’s connector into the accessory  
connector, until you hear a click.  
Your phone is now sending location data to your  
laptop or other device.  
To stop your phone from sending location data to  
your laptop or other device:  
Set NMEA OUT to Off.  
Each time you power your phone on, NMEA OUT  
is automatically set to Off.  
3 Insert the data plug into the COM port of your  
laptop or other device.  
Make sure no other application is using the COM  
port selected.  
172  
 
•
•
A repeat — lets you store the event as a  
recurring event.  
A reminder — If an event has a start time, you  
can set Datebook to remind you that the event is  
going to start.  
Datebook  
Datebook stores up to 250 events. You can store  
events over a 13 month period — 12 months after  
and 1 month before the current date.  
•
•
a ring tone for the reminder  
a profile that your phone is switched to while the  
event is occurring  
a Java application that starts when the event  
starts  
A Datebook event contains:  
•
•
•
A subject — A name you assign to the event.  
You can also enter a phone number or BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number here. After the event is  
stored, you can call this number from Datebook  
or when you get a reminder of this event.  
•
Only the subject and date are required.  
A location — The location of the event. You can  
also enter a phone number or BoostTM  
Viewing Datebook  
To access Datebook:  
Walkie-Talkie numberhere. After the event is  
stored, you can call this number from Datebook  
or when you get a reminder of this event.  
From the main menu, select Datebook.  
A start time — The start time automatically  
assigned to an event is the beginning of the day.  
You can change the start time, or assign no start  
time, before storing the event.  
You can view Datebook by the day, by the week, or  
by the month. You can also view the details of any  
event.  
In day view, brief information about each event for  
that day appears.  
•
•
A duration — The length of time the event lasts.  
A date — The date automatically assigned to an  
event is the date that was highlighted or  
selected when you began creating the event.  
You can change this date before storing the  
event.  
In week view, events appear as markers  
corresponding to their times.  
In month view, days with events appear with a  
marker in the corner.  
173  
     
Creating Events  
To view an event:  
3 Select the date you want.  
1 Select the day the event occurs.  
2 Select the event.  
Creating Events  
Every Datebook event must have a subject and be  
stored to a date. Other information is optional.  
To change the current view:  
1 While viewing Datebook, press m.  
2 Select the view you want.  
Note: Day view is the default setting.  
You may enter the information in any order by  
scrolling through the event details.  
After you have entered the information you want,  
you can press A under Done to store the event to  
Datebook.  
Navigating Datebook  
To scroll through Datebook:  
If you decide you do not want to store the event:  
Press A under Cancel.  
Scroll left and right using the navigation key. -or-  
In week view and month view, press * or #.  
To see more in day view:  
To create a Datebook event:  
1 While viewing datebook, press A under New.  
-or-  
Scroll up and down using the navigation key.  
To highlight a day in month view:  
Enter the date using the keypad.  
To go to today’s date:  
In day view, select [New Event].  
2 To assign a subject to the event:  
Select Subject.  
1 While viewing Datebook, press m.  
2 Select Go To Today.  
Enter the name (see “Entering Text” on page  
55). -or-  
Press A under Browse to choose from  
common event names. -or-  
To go to any date in Datebook:  
1 While viewing Datebook, press m.  
2 Select Go To Date.  
174  
 
Datebook  
Enter a phone number, BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
number. After the event is stored, you can call  
this number.  
you began creating the event. To change the  
date of the event:  
Select Date.  
When you are finished, press O.  
3 If you want to assign a location to the event:  
Select Location.  
Enter the date you want.  
7 If you want to make the event a recurring event:  
Select Repeat.  
Enter the location. -or-  
Select the repeat cycle you want.  
Enter a phone number, BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
number. After the event is stored, you can call  
this number.  
If the event occurs more than once a week:  
Select Multiple Day. Select the days you want.  
Press A under Done.  
When you are finished, press O.  
In the End field, select the date you want this  
event to stop recurring.  
4 The start time automatically assigned to an  
event is the beginning of the day. If you want to  
change the start time or assign no start time:  
8 If you want to create a reminder for this event:  
Select Reminder.  
Select Start.  
Enter the start time you want. -or-  
Press A under No Time to assign no start time.  
5 If you want to assign a duration to the event:  
Select Duration.  
Select the reminder time you want. -or-  
Select Custom to enter a reminder time.  
Note: If an event has no start time, you cannot  
create a reminder for it.  
9 If you have entered all the information you want  
for this event, press A under Done. -or-  
Select the duration you want. -or-  
Select Custom to enter a duration.  
If you want to assign a ringtone, a profile, or a  
Java application to the event, see “Assigning  
More Options”.  
6 The date automatically assigned to an event is  
the date that was highlighted or selected when  
175  
Editing Events  
Assigning More Options  
To assign more options before storing an event:  
Editing Events  
To change the details of an event:  
1 If you have created a reminder for the event and  
1 Select the day the event occurs.  
2 Select the event.  
3 Press A under Edit.  
want to set the ring tone for that reminder:  
Select Ringtone.  
Select the ringtone you want from the ringtones  
stored in your phone.  
4 Follow the applicable instructions in “Creating  
Events” on page 174 to edit the various fields.  
2 If you want to assign a profile that your phone is  
To copy an event to another date:  
switched to while the event is occurring:  
1 Select the day the event occurs.  
2 Select the event.  
Select Profile.  
Select the profile you want from the profiles  
stored in your phone.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Copy.  
Your phone switches to this profile when the  
event starts and switches back to the previous  
profile when the event ends.  
5 Press A under Yes to confirm.  
6 Enter the date you want.  
7 Press O.  
8 If you want to change more information, follow  
the applicable instructions in “Creating Events”  
on page 174 to edit the various fields.  
3 If you want to assign a Java application to start  
when the event starts:  
Select App.  
9 Press A under Done to store the event.  
Select the application you want from the Java  
applications stored in your phone.  
Deleting Events  
1 Select the day the event occurs.  
2 Select the event.  
If you created a reminder for this event, your  
phone prompts you to start the Java application  
when you get the reminder.  
3 Press m.  
176  
         
Datebook  
4 Select Delete.  
5 If the event is not a recurring event, press O or  
press A under Yes to confirm. -or-  
Making Calls From Datebook  
and Datebook Reminders  
If you stored a phone number, BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie number in the Subject or Location  
field of a Datebook event, you can call or send a  
call alert to that number from Datebook or from the  
reminder of that event.  
If the event is a recurring event:  
Select This Event Only to delete only the event  
selected in step 2.  
Select Repeat Event to delete all occurrences  
of the event.  
If you store numbers in both the Subject and  
Location fields, you can call or send a call alert to  
the number stored in Subject and the number  
stored in Location as long as the number stored in  
Subject is a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie number and the  
number stored in Location is a phone number.  
Receiving Reminders  
If you created a reminder for a Datebook event,  
when the reminder time occurs, your phone notifies  
you with text on the display and a reminder tone.  
If both are the same type of number, the number in  
Subject is called or sent a call alert. To call or send  
a call alert to the number stored in Location, you  
must delete the number stored in Subject.  
To view more details about the event:  
Press A under View.  
To dismiss the reminder:  
Making Calls from Datebook  
Press O, press A under Dismiss.  
To make a call or send a call alert:  
For Events with Java Applications  
If you assigned a Java application to start when the  
event starts, you can start the application when you  
get the reminder.  
1 Highlight or select the event containing the  
number you want to call or send a call alert to.  
2 To make a phone call:  
Press s. -or-  
1 Press m.  
Press m. Select Call # in Event.  
2 Select Launch.  
177  
     
Customizing Datebook Setup  
To make a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call:  
Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button. -or-  
To send a call alert:  
Customizing Datebook Setup  
To access Datebook set up options:  
1 From the main menu, select Datebook.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Setup.  
Press m. Select Alert # in Event. Press the  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button.  
Making Calls from Datebook  
Reminders  
To make a phone call:  
You can view or change these options:  
•
•
•
•
•
Start View — sets Datebook to start in day view,  
week view, or month view when you access  
Datebook.  
Daily Begin — sets the beginning of your day.  
This is the earliest time of day displayed in week  
view, if you have a 12-hour day view.  
Delete After — sets the amount of time  
Datebook waits to delete an event after it  
occurs.  
Time Shift — lets you shift the times of all  
Datebook events. This is useful if you are  
traveling to a different time zone.  
Press s. -or-  
Press m. Select Call # in Event.  
To make a BoostTM Walkie-Talkie call:  
Press the BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button. -or-  
To send a call alert:  
Press m. Select Alert # in Event. Press the  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button.  
Alert Timeout — sets the amount of time a tone  
continues to sound when you receive a  
message notification, call alert, or Datebook  
reminder.  
•
Clock — controls whether the time and date  
appear on the idle screen; sets time and date  
format; sets year.  
178  
 
To set your phone to vibrate instead of making a  
sound when you receive BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
calls, even if you want your phone to ring for other  
features:  
Customizing Your Phone  
Setting the Volume  
Of the Earpiece and Speaker  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > WT  
Options > Alert Type.  
Tip: If Alert Type does not appear: From the  
main menu, select Ringtones. Make sure  
VibeAll is set to Off. Repeat step 1.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Volume.  
2 Scroll to Earpiece to set the earpiece volume.  
-or-  
Scroll to Speaker to set the speaker volume.  
3 To set the volume:  
2 Select Vibrate to set your phone to vibrate.  
Tip: Select Silent in step 2 to set your phone to  
neither vibrate nor make a sound.  
Scroll left or right. -or-  
Press the volume controls.  
Of the Ringer  
Changing the Look of Your  
Phone  
Wallpaper  
A wallpaper is an image that appears on the idle  
screen.  
Press the volume controls.  
Setting Your Phone to Vibrate  
To set your phone to vibrate instead of making a  
sound when you receive phone calls, BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie calls, call alerts, message  
Note: Some themes may prevent you from  
changing your wallpaper.  
notifications, and Datebook reminders, see  
“Setting Your Phone to Vibrate” on page 82.  
Choosing a Wallpaper  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Wallpaper > Wallpaper.  
2 Select the wallpaper you want.  
179  
                     
Changing the Look of Your Phone  
2 Set this option to Large Digits.  
Tip: If you want to see what the wallpaper looks  
like, scroll to the wallpaper you want to view  
and press A under View.  
Setting the Menu View  
Setting Wallpaper to Change Automatically  
You can set the items on your main menu and Java  
applications menu to appear as large icons or a  
list:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Wallpaper > Auto Cycle.  
2 Select how often you want the wallpaper to  
change.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Menu View. -or-  
3 Select Select Pictures.  
4 Select the pictures you want to appear as  
wallpaper.  
From the main menu: Press m. Select Main  
Menu Setup > Menu View.  
2 To choose a list, select List View. -or-  
5 Press A under Done.  
To choose large icons, select Icon View.  
Setting Text Size  
To set the size of the text on the internal display:  
Setting the Backlight  
A backlight lights the display and keypad when you  
make or receive a call, open or close the flip, or  
press keys or buttons.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Text Size.  
2 Select the option you want:  
To control how long the backlight stays on:  
•
•
Zoom — 11 characters per line  
Standard — 14 characters per line  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Backlight > Timer.  
2 Select the number of seconds you want the  
backlight to stay on.  
• Compressed — 18 characters per line  
To set your phone to briefly display very large  
digits when you enter numbers at the idle screen:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Large Dialing.  
180  
 
Customizing Your Phone  
To control how long the backlight stays on for Java  
applications:  
Note: While powering on your phone, you can  
turn transmitters off by pressing p for  
more than 5 seconds.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Backlight > Java Timer.  
2 Select the number of seconds you want the  
backlight to stay on for Java applications.  
To restore your phone’s ability to do all these  
things:  
Set this option to On.  
To set the keypad backlight to light up only in low  
light conditions:  
Note: When Transmitters is set to Off, your  
phone’s Bluetooth capability is disabled,  
and all active Bluetooth connections are  
dropped.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Display/Info > Backlight > Sensor.  
2 Set this option to On.  
Using Settings  
Settings contains many submenus that let you  
customize your phone.  
Temporarily Turning Off  
Transmissions  
Sometimes you may want to have your phone on,  
but turn off its ability to make and receive calls and  
other transmissions.  
For information on applying groups of settings to  
your phone together, see “Profiles” on page 186.  
Note: Because your phone’s audio player is  
actually a Java application that you  
access from the main menu, the settings  
described here will not affect the audio  
player unless they affect Java  
To set your phone so that it cannot make or receive  
phone calls, BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls, or  
transfer data:  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Advanced > Transmitters.  
applications.  
2 Set this option to Off.  
This icon 9appears.  
181  
           
Using Settings  
Display/Info Features  
Phone Calls Features  
The Display/Info menu controls how the keypad  
and display appear:  
The Phone Calls menu controls how your phone  
handles phone calls:  
•
Wallpaper — changes the wallpaper that  
•
•
•
•
Set Line — sets phone line 1 as the active line  
appears on the idle screen.  
for outgoing calls.  
•
•
•
Text Size — sets the size of text on the display.  
Theme — changes the look of the display.  
Home Icons — controls whether main menu  
icons appear on the idle screen.  
Any Key Ans — If this feature is on, you can  
answer calls by pressing any key on the keypad.  
Auto Redial — sets your phone to automatically  
redial calls you make when the system is busy.  
Auto Ans — sets your phone to automatically  
answer an incoming call after a specified  
number of rings. When this feature is on, the  
phone answers by connecting you to the caller;  
it does not send the call to voice mail, unless  
you are out of coverage or on the line.  
Flip Activation — See “Setting Flip Actions” on  
page 71.  
Minute Beep — causes a beep to sound every  
minute of an active call.  
Call Duration — causes the duration of a call to  
appear on the display when the call ends.  
TTY — See “Making TTY Calls” on page 74.  
•
•
Backlight — controls backlight illumination.  
Clock — controls whether the time and date  
appear on the idle screen; sets time and date  
format; sets year.  
Menu View — controls whether the items on  
your main menu and Java applications menu  
appear as large icons or a list.  
Large Dialing — sets large digits to appear on  
the idle screen when you enter a number.  
Contrast Ext — sets the contrast of the external  
display.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Language — sets the language that your phone  
displays.  
182  
                 
Customizing Your Phone  
•
Hearing Aid — sets your phone for use with a  
hearing aid. Set to Microphone for most hearing  
aids; set to Telecoil for telecoil hearing aids.  
This setting effects only sounds from the  
phone’s earpiece.  
Notifications — See “Message Notifications” on  
page 99.  
Personalize Features  
The Personalize menu makes main menu items  
easier to access.  
•
Menu Options — Reorder Menu lets you  
change the order of the items on the main menu  
by grabbing and moving them; Add/Remove  
Apps lets you create a shortcut to a Java  
application on the main menu.  
•
•
DTMF Dialing — sets whether you can hear  
keypad presses during a call.  
•
•
Up Key — sets the main menu item you access  
when you scroll up from the idle screen.  
Walkie-Talkie Options Features  
Down Key — sets the main menu item you  
access when you scroll down from the idle  
screen.  
The Walkie-Talkie Options menu controls how your  
phone handles BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls:  
•
•
One Touch WT — See “One Touch BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie (WT)” on page 71.  
Tkgrp Silent — controls whether you hear  
group calls to your Talkgroup. See “Call Timers”  
on page 72.  
•
•
Left Key — sets the main menu item you access  
when you scroll left from the idle screen.  
Right Key — sets the main menu item you  
access when you scroll right from the idle  
screen.  
•
•
Tkgrp Area — lets you define your Talkgroup  
area.  
•
•
Center Key — sets the main menu item you  
access when you press O from the idle screen.  
Alert Type — controls how your phone notifies  
you when you receive BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
calls and group calls.  
WT Send Picture — sets your phone’s ability to  
send and receive pictures in BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie calls. See “Using Walkie-Talkie  
Send” on page 138.  
Left Softkey — sets the main menu item you  
access when you press the left option key from  
the idle screen.  
•
•
Right Softkey — sets the main menu item you  
access when you press the right option key from  
the idle screen.  
183  
       
Using Settings  
•
Power Up — sets the main menu item you see  
when you power on your phone. To set the idle  
screen to be the first thing you see when you  
power on your phone, select Default Ready.  
Security Features  
The Security menu lets you turn security features  
on and off and change passwords:  
•
Phone Lock — turns on a feature that locks  
your phone: Lock Now takes effect immediately;  
Auto Lock takes effect when your phone is  
powered off and then on. An unlock code is  
required to enable this feature, to unlock the  
phone, and to set a new unlock code. Contact  
BoostTM Customer Care for your default unlock  
code.  
Volume Features  
The Volume menu sets the volume of sounds your  
phone makes:  
•
•
Line 1 — sets ringer volume for phone line 1.  
Messages — sets the volume of message  
notifications and Datebook reminders.  
•
•
•
•
Keypad Lock — locks the phone’s keypad,  
either immediately or automatically after a set  
period of inactivity.  
SIM PIN — enables and disables your phone’s  
SIM PIN security feature. See “Turning the PIN  
Requirement On and Off” on page 13.  
GPS PIN — enables and disables your phone’s  
GPS PIN security feature. See “Setting the GPS  
PIN Security Feature” on page 170.  
Change Passwords — changes your phone  
unlock code, security code, SIM PIN, and GPS  
PIN.  
•
•
•
•
Earpiece — sets the volume of sound coming  
out of the earpiece.  
Speaker — sets the volume of sound coming  
out of the speaker.  
Keypad — sets the volume of sound associated  
with pressing keys and buttons.  
Java Earpiece — sets the volume of sound  
associated with Java applications coming out of  
the earpiece.  
Java Speaker —sets the volume of sound  
associated with Java applications coming out of  
the speaker.  
•
•
Data — sets the volume of sounds that notify  
you that you are receiving a circuit data call.  
184  
               
Customizing Your Phone  
•
Reset Defaults — Reset Settings returns all  
settings to their original defaults; Reset All  
returns all settings to their original defaults and  
erases all stored lists. Use only under the  
direction of BoostTM Customer Care.  
Return to Home — controls how long the recent  
calls list displays after calls.  
Transmitters — prevents your phone from  
making or receiving phone calls, BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie calls or transferring data.  
Baud Rate — sets the baud rate at which your  
phone communicates with a laptop computer,  
PC, or similar device.  
Advanced Features  
The Advanced menu contains advanced Settings  
features.  
•
Alert Timeout — sets the amount of time a tone  
continues to sound when you receive a  
message notification, call alert, or Datebook  
reminder.  
•
•
•
•
Headset/Spkr — sets headset option. See  
“Using a Headset” on page 192.  
Memory Card — Store Media controls whether  
pictures, videos, and audio files are saved to the  
phone’s memory or to the memory card;  
Remove Card enables you to safely remove the  
memory card from the phone; Format Card  
formats the memory card so that data can be  
save to it.  
•
Important: The Format Card option erases any data  
saved to the memory card. It should  
only be used if your phone prompts you  
to format the memory card.  
•
Connectivity — Network ID sets the phone’s  
network IDs and their roaming options under the  
direction of BoostTM Customer Care; Master  
Reset lets BoostTM Customer Care reset your  
service in the event of a security or provisioning  
problem.  
185  
         
Viewing Profiles  
Profiles  
To view the profiles stored in your phone:  
A profile is a group of settings saved together so  
that you can apply them to your phone easily.  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Scroll to the profile you want to view.  
A profile contains these settings:  
Tip: The profile that is currently in effect on your  
•
•
•
Ringtones — sets all options described in  
“Ringtones” on page 82, except assigning ring  
tones to Contacts.  
Display/Info — sets Wallpaper, Theme, Text  
Size, and Backlight options. See “Display/Info  
Features” on page 182.  
Phone Calls — sets Set Line and Auto  
Answer options. See “Phone Calls Features” on  
page 182.  
Volume — sets all options described in “Volume  
Features” on page 184.  
Call Filter — controls which calls, call alerts,  
and message notifications your phone responds  
to. See “Setting Call Filtering” on page 189.  
phone has a checkmark next to it.  
3 Press A under View.  
4 Scroll to view settings.  
Switching Profiles  
To apply a profile to your phone:  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Scroll to the profile you want to apply.  
3 Press O.  
•
•
The profile you selected is now in effect.  
How Changing Settings  
Affects Profiles  
•
Advanced — sets headset option. See “Using a  
Headset” on page 192.  
Many of the settings contained in profiles can be  
set without switching or editing profiles — for  
example, by selecting Settings or Ringtones to  
set options, or by setting the volume of the phone’s  
ring using the volume controls.  
Your phone arrives with pre-set profiles. You can  
also create your own profiles.  
186  
               
Profiles  
When you do this, your phone either:  
A temporary profile stays in effect until you switch  
profiles, power off your phone, or delete it (or the  
profile it is based on) from the list of profiles.  
•
Updates the profile in effect to reflect these  
changes, without notifying you -or-  
If you do not store a temporary profile, it is deleted  
when you switch profiles or power off your phone.  
•
Creates a temporary profile that contains these  
changes  
A temporary profile is automatically given the same  
name as the profile it is based on, but with an  
asterisk (*) in front of it.  
To set your phone to create a temporary profile  
that contains changes you make to settings:  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Setup > Temp Profile.  
4 Set this option to On.  
When you view a temporary profile’s settings, the  
options that differ from the profile it is based on  
have an asterisk in front of them.  
Storing a Temporary Profile  
To store a temporary profile as a new profile:  
To set your phone to update the profile in effect to  
reflect any changes you make to settings:  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Scroll to the temporary profile.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Store As New.  
5 Enter the name you want to give the profile.  
Set Temp Profile to Off in step 4.  
Temporary Profiles  
If your phone is set to create temporary profiles, a  
temporary profile is created when you make  
changes to settings without switching or editing  
profiles.  
When you are finished, press O.  
To overwrite the profile the temporary profile is  
based on:  
A temporary profile is based on the profile in effect  
when you made the changes, but reflects the  
changed settings. Making more changes further  
updates the temporary profile, for as long as it is in  
effect.  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Scroll to the temporary profile.  
3 Press m.  
187  
   
Creating Profiles  
4 Select Store Changes.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Edit.  
5 Scroll through the list of options and set their  
values.  
The temporary profile is stored with the name of  
the profile it is based on. The profile it is based on,  
as it existed before you made changes to settings,  
is gone.  
Deleting Profiles  
Creating Profiles  
To delete a profile:  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Scroll to the profile you want to delete.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
2 Select [New Profile]. -or-  
Scroll to any profile. Press m. Select New.  
3 Enter the name you want to give the profile.  
When you are finished, press O.  
To delete all profiles:  
4 If you want to base this profile on an existing  
profile: Select Copy From. Select the profile you  
want to base this profile on. If you do not choose  
a profile to copy from, the new profile is based  
on a default profile.  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Press m.  
3 Select Delete All.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
5 Press A under Create.  
6 Scroll through the list of options and set their  
values.  
7 Press A under Done.  
Editing Profiles  
1 From the main menu, select Profiles.  
2 Scroll to the profile you want to edit.  
188  
           
Profiles  
•
•
Off sets your phone to notify you of all  
Setting Call Filtering  
The call filtering setting in each profile lets you  
control which calls, call alerts, and message  
notifications your phone notifies you of, and which  
it ignores.  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls.  
On sets your phone to ignore all BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie calls.  
5 To set filtering options for call alerts, select  
Alerts.  
•
To set call filtering:  
Off sets your phone to notify you of all call  
alerts.  
On sets your phone to ignore all call alerts.  
1 While setting options for a profile, select Call  
Filter.  
•
2 To set filtering options for phone calls, select  
Phone.  
6 To set filtering options for message notifications,  
select Notifications.  
•
Off sets your phone to notify you of all phone  
•
•
Off sets your phone to notify you of all  
calls.  
messages.  
•
•
All sets your phone to ignore all phone calls.  
Voice Messages sets your phone not to  
sound a tone or vibrate when you receive  
voice messages.  
Text Messages sets your phone not to sound  
a tone or vibrate when you receive text  
messages.  
All Contacts sets your phone to notify you  
only of phone calls from numbers stored in  
Contacts.  
•
•
• Some Contacts sets your phone to notify you  
only of phone calls from numbers you select  
from Contacts.  
3 If you set the Phone option to Some Contacts,  
select up to 5 Contacts entries that contain  
phone numbers you want to be notified of calls  
from.  
All sets your phone not to sound a tone or  
vibrate when you receive any message.  
Note: When you receive a message you have  
set not to sound a tone or vibrate, the  
message notification screen still appears.  
When you are finished, press A under Done.  
7 Press A under Done.  
4 To set filtering options for BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
calls, select Prvt/Grp.  
189  
   
6 Press O.  
Shortcuts  
7 If you want to record a voice name for the  
shortcut: Select Voice. As directed by the  
screen prompts, say and repeat the name you  
want to assign to the number. Speak clearly into  
the microphone.  
Shortcuts lets you access most menu options by  
pressing a number on your keypad (1 through 9) or  
saying the voice name of the shortcut. You create  
the shortcut and then use it to take you to that  
screen any time.  
8 Press A under Done.  
9 If the number key you chose is already assigned  
to a shortcut, a prompt appears asking if you  
want to replace the existing shortcut.  
Creating a Shortcut  
Note: When you receive your phone, all number  
keys may already be assigned to  
shortcuts. If this is the case, you can  
create new shortcuts by deleting or  
replacing existing shortcuts.  
Press A under Yes to replace the existing  
shortcut. -or-  
Press A under No if you want to keep the  
existing shortcut and assign another number key  
to the shortcut.  
1 Go to the menu item you want to create a  
shortcut for.  
Using a Shortcut  
For example, if you want to create a shortcut to  
the screen for creating a new Contacts entry:  
From the main menu, select Contacts, then  
highlight [New Contact].  
If you know the shortcut number:  
1 From the idle screen, press m.  
2 On your keypad, press the number assigned to  
the shortcut.  
2 Press and hold m until a confirmation screen  
appears.  
If you do not know the shortcut number:  
3 Press O or press A under Yes.  
4 Select Key.  
5 Press the number key you want to assign to the  
shortcut.  
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts.  
2 Scroll to the shortcut you want to use. -or-  
190  
           
Shortcuts  
If you assigned a voice name to the shortcut:  
Press and hold t. Say the voice name into your  
phone. The shortcut with that voice name is then  
highlighted.  
4 With Key or Voice highlighted, press O to  
change assignments.  
Deleting Shortcuts  
To delete a shortcut:  
3 Press O.  
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts.  
2 Scroll to the shortcut you want to delete.  
3 Press m.  
4 Select Delete.  
5 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
Editing a Shortcut  
To change the number assigned to a shortcut:  
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts.  
2 With any shortcut highlighted, press m.  
3 Select Reorder.  
4 Scroll to the shortcut you want to move.  
5 Press A under Grab.  
6 Scroll to the place where you want the shortcut  
to appear.  
7 Press A under Insert.  
To delete all shortcuts:  
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts.  
2 With any shortcut highlighted, press m.  
3 Select Delete All.  
4 Press O or press A under Yes to confirm.  
8 Repeat step 4 through step 7 for all the items  
you want to move.  
9 Press A under Done.  
To change the number or voice name assigned to  
a shortcut:  
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts.  
2 Highlight any shortcut.  
3 Press A under Edit.  
191  
       
Using a Bluetooth® Headset  
You can use your i875 wirelessly with a Bluetooth  
headset. This type of wireless headset lets you  
connect quickly to devices that are within range.  
Using a Headset  
If you use a headset or similar device with your  
phone, you can set your phone to send incoming  
sound to the headset only, or to the headset and  
the speaker at the same time:  
For more information, refer to your Bluetooth  
headset’s user guide.  
Note: The preferred connection to your phone is  
a wired audio device. If you insert a wired  
headset into the stereo headset jack on  
your phone, audio will be routed to the  
wired headset and you will lose your  
Bluetooth headset connection.  
Attaching a Headset  
The i875 phone is compatible with stereo  
headsets, stereo BoostTM Walkie-Talkie Headsets,  
mono headsets, and mono BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
Headsets.  
1 From the main menu, select Settings >  
Advanced > Headset/Spkr.  
2 Select HdsetOnly to send incoming sound to  
the headset only. -or-  
1 Lift the stereo headset jack cover.  
2 Insert the headset connector firmly into the  
stereo headset jack. You may have to rotate the  
headset connector until it fits securely into the  
stereo headset jack.  
Select Hdset&Spkr to send incoming sound to  
the headset and ring tones to the speaker.  
Note: If you are using your phone with a  
headset, and you have the Flip to End  
option set to On, closing your flip sends  
incoming sound to the headset and does  
not end the call. See “Setting Flip Actions”  
on page 71.  
Using a Remote BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie Button  
If you are using a headset or other accessory with  
a remote BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button, you can  
use the remote BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button for  
phone calls and BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls.  
192  
               
Using a Headset  
For phone calls, use the remote BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie button to answer calls, switch  
between calls, and end calls. Hold the remote  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button for less than 2  
seconds to answer calls and switch between calls.  
Hold the remote BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button for  
more than 2 seconds to end calls.  
For BoostTM Walkie-Talkie calls, use the remote  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button as you would the  
BoostTM Walkie-Talkie button on your phone.  
Note: When using a headset, the BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie button on your phone works  
the same way as when you are not using  
a headset. BoostTM Walkie-Talkie sounds  
will be heard through the headset.  
193  
You'll want to keep this information handy so that  
you can replace the battery and power up your  
phone should the representative need you to  
access other information on it during your call.  
BoostTM Customer Care  
You can contact BoostTM Customer Care 7 days a  
week simply by dialing 611 from your i875 phone,  
or by calling 1-888-BOOST-4U (1-888-266-7848).  
Our BoostTM Customer Care team will assist you in  
answering all your questions. Or, visit  
www.boostmobile.com for a variety of BoostTM  
Customer Care services online.  
Before you contact BoostTM Customer Care for  
service or to resolve an issue, be sure to have your  
BoostTM Personal Telephone Number, your model  
number (located on your phone underneath the  
battery), and the ID number printed on your SIM  
card. You’ll want to record these numbers, and  
keep them handy, so that you can replace the  
battery prior to contacting BoostTM Customer Care.  
Please have the following information available to  
give to the representative who answers your  
inquiry.  
•
•
Your Personal Telephone Number (PTN).  
Your phone's model number (located  
underneath the battery).  
•
The ID numbers printed on your SIM.  
194  
   
Status  
Status  
Message Description  
Understanding Status  
Messages  
Messages Messages  
(one-line  
display)  
(full-screen  
display)  
You may receive status messages under certain  
conditions. Before contacting BoostTM Customer  
Care Customer Care, note the message, numeric  
code, and the conditions under which it appeared.  
The following table lists and describes the status  
messages.  
The person that you called  
has not purchased this  
service.  
Not Avail.  
User Not  
Authorized  
The phone that you called  
is either busy, out of  
coverage, or turned off.  
Please try again later.  
Not Avail.  
User Not  
Available  
Note: When your battery door is closed, the  
one-line display screen shows a  
shortened version the status messages  
displayed in the full-size screen. To see  
complete status messages, open the  
battery door.  
The phone that you called  
is busy in a BoostTM  
Walkie-Talkie call.  
Busy in Prvt. User Busy in  
Boost  
Walkie-Talkie  
call  
The phone that you called  
is busy using BoostTM  
Busy in Data User Busy in  
Data  
Status  
Status  
Message Description  
Wireless Web services.  
Messages Messages  
(one-line  
display)  
(full-screen  
display)  
This service was restricted  
by BoostTM, or this service  
was not purchased.  
Restricted  
Not Avail.  
Service  
Restricted  
The number that you  
entered is not valid.  
Number Not Number Not in  
in Service  
You are either out of  
coverage or having  
problems with  
Service  
Service Not  
Available  
This service is temporarily  
not available. Please try  
again later.  
Failed  
Please Try  
Later  
provisioning.  
The system is  
experiencing heavy traffic.  
Please try again later.  
System  
Busy  
System Busy  
195  
     
Status  
Status  
Message Description  
Status  
Status  
Message Description  
Messages Messages  
Messages Messages  
(one-line  
display)  
(full-screen  
display)  
(one-line  
display)  
(full-screen  
display)  
You have attempted to  
reach a BoostTM customer  
using One Touch BoostTM  
walkie-talkie, but there is  
no BoostTM Walkie-Talkie  
number stored in your  
recent calls list.  
A fault was detected with  
your phone. If this error  
recurs, note the error code  
and contact BoostTM  
Failed  
No Dispatch  
Number Stored  
Self Check  
Self Check  
Self Check  
Error + Number  
Code  
Customer Care.  
An operational fault was  
detected with your phone.  
Note the numeric code,  
turn your phone off, and  
contact BoostTM Customer  
Care.  
Self Check Fail  
+ Number Code  
This service cannot be  
enabled because an  
incompatible service has  
already been turned on.  
Service  
Conflict  
An error occurred. Please  
try again.  
The incorrect PIN was  
entered three consecutive  
times. You will be unable  
to place or receive calls on  
your phone. Contact  
BoostTM Customer Care to  
have them obtain the PIN  
Unblocking Key (PUK)  
code.  
Try Again  
Please Try  
Again  
PIN Blocked PIN Blocked  
Call Your  
Provider  
You have entered an  
incorrect PIN number.  
No message. SIM PIN  
incorrect. Try  
again.  
You have inserted a SIM  
that will not work with a  
BoostTM phone. Contact  
BoostTM Customer Care if  
you believe this is a valid  
SIM.  
No message. Please Enter  
Special Code  
Your SIM card is not being  
detected. Please check to  
ensure that you have  
inserted the SIM correctly  
into your phone.  
Insert SIM  
Insert SIM  
196  
Understanding Status Messages  
Status  
Status  
Message Description  
Status  
Status  
Message Description  
Messages Messages  
Messages Messages  
(one-line  
display)  
(full-screen  
display)  
(one-line  
display)  
(full-screen  
display)  
Please check your SIM to  
make sure it has been  
inserted properly.  
Could not find GPS  
satellites.  
Check SIM  
Check SIM  
Card  
Unable to  
Locate Sats  
Directs you to update GPS  
satellite almanac data.  
For Update  
Visit:  
Please enter your 4- to 8-  
digit SIM PIN code.  
Enter PIN  
Unit Lock  
Enter SIM PIN  
A problem occurred in  
your phone’s GPS  
circuitry. If this error  
occurs, contact BoostTM  
Customer Care.  
Auto Phone Lock is  
activated. Enter you  
unlock code.  
Technical Error  
Enter Unlock  
Code  
A problem occurred in  
your phone’s camera. If  
this error occurs, contact  
your service provider.  
Hardware  
Failure  
Your phone’s camera is  
temporarily unavailable for  
user. Please try again  
later.  
Resource Not  
Available  
Warns of low memory for  
Web Alerts.  
Low Memory New Browser  
Message  
Memory Full!  
Searching for GPS  
satellites.  
Scanning for  
Satellites  
197  
accompanying the Activation Guide, the terms and  
conditions of the then-current applicable  
Boost MobileTM Terms  
and Conditions of  
Service  
Service/Subscriber Agreement will control. The  
Service is provided to you through the Company as  
agent for, and using the Digital Mobile Network (the  
“System”) of, Nextel Communications, Inc. and its  
affiliates and subsidiaries (collectively, “Nextel”).  
All rights and protections afforded to the Company  
by this Agreement are also afforded to Nextel  
through Nextel’s principal-agent relationship with  
the Company.  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF PREPAID  
SERVICE: PLEASE READ THESE TERMS AND  
CONDITIONS CAREFULLY. THEY CONSTITUTE  
A BINDING AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”)  
BETWEEN YOU AND BOOST MOBILE.  
1. SERVICE ACTIVATION - To activate the  
Service and the call credits in your BOOST  
You (“Customer”) accept the terms of this  
Agreement (a) by calling to activate BOOST  
MOBILESM wireless communications services  
(“Service”), (b) by purchasing BOOST MOBILE  
wireless communications equipment (the  
MOBILE Activation Guide, you must call our free  
automated service number before the date shown.  
Remember that by calling this number to activate  
your service, you are agreeing to these Terms and  
Conditions of Prepaid Service. By activating the  
Service you also authorize Company to exchange  
with its related business entities, contractors or  
agents who may be involved in providing the  
Service, any customer information you may have  
provided to Company that is necessary for these  
related businesses, contractors, and entities to  
assist the Company in providing the Service.  
Company may suspend or cancel the Service at  
any time without notice if: (i) there are reasonable  
grounds to suspect the information provided by  
Customer to Boost Mobile or its agent for user  
registration or when you activated your Service,  
“Equipment”) or Service or replenishing your  
airtime through boostmobile.com, or (c) by signing  
this Agreement, whichever applies. By using the  
Equipment, you subscribe to the Service provided  
by Boost Mobile (sometimes “Company”). If you  
have not signed a printed copy of this Agreement  
and do not accept these terms, do not activate your  
phone; you may return your phone for a full refund,  
within 10 days of purchase, to the retail store  
where you purchased it. Should there be any  
conflict between the terms and conditions below,  
and the terms and conditions of any applicable  
Service/Subscriber Agreement between Customer  
and Company covering the Equipment  
198  
 
Boost MobileTM Terms and Conditions of Service  
was incomplete or incorrect or if there has been  
fraud or misuse by you in relation to the Service; (ii)  
you breach any of the terms or conditions in this  
Agreement; or (iii) you do anything which in the  
Company’s opinion, may cause damage to the  
System. In addition, Service may be suspended,  
changed or terminated without notice.  
Boost Mobile will be under no obligation to replace  
them or compensate you. If Boost Mobile does  
choose to replace your SIM card, you may be  
charged a replacement fee.  
4. USE OF SERVICE – Customer agrees to  
comply with all statutes, rules and regulations  
applicable to Customer, including all applicable  
rules of the Federal Communications Commission  
(the “FCC”). Customer will not use the Service for  
any unlawful purpose. Customer will not use the  
Service in aircraft or in motor vehicles in violation  
of law, regulation or ordinance. Customer  
acknowledges and agrees that all future purchases  
of Company Services and Equipment by customer  
shall be governed by the terms and conditions  
contained herein unless Customer and Company  
enter into a subsequent Service/Subscriber  
Agreement. Company may change this Agreement  
at any time. Any changes are effective when  
Company provides Customer with written notice  
stating the effective date of the change(s). If  
Customer elects to use the Services or make any  
payment to Company on or after the effective date  
of the changes, Customer is deemed to have  
accepted the change(s). If Customer does not  
accept the changes, Customer may terminate  
Services as of the effective date of the changes.  
2. CALL CREDITS – Your call credits are valid for  
the Call Credit Validity Period, i.e., from the date of  
their activation, until the call credit expiration date.  
Refer to your rate plan table for details. You may  
purchase additional RE-BOOSTTM Cards at any  
time but you must activate them by calling the  
designated BOOST MOBILE Customer Care  
number before the expiration date of the  
RE-BOOST Card. If you don’t use your call credits  
or replenish your service within the Call Credit  
Validity Period, your call credits will expire and your  
mobile number will be withdrawn at the end of a  
60-day Grace Period. There is a limit of $300 in  
call credits that may be aggregated on your service  
at any time. RE-BOOST Cards can be used once  
only. Call credits are not transferable or  
redeemable for cash.  
3. SIM CARDS – The BOOST MOBILE pre-paid  
SIM card remains the property of Boost Mobile at  
all times. Should your BOOST MOBILE pre-paid  
SIM card or RE-BOOST Card(s) be lost or stolen,  
199  
5. CUSTOMER MOBILE DIGITAL EQUIPMENT –  
Customer must have a Company approved  
handset or device and must be a BOOST MOBILE  
Service customer to access the Service. Company  
is not responsible for the installation, operation,  
quality of transmission, or maintenance of the  
Equipment. Any change in Service or Equipment  
may require additional programming or Equipment  
or changes to assigned codes or numbers that may  
require programming fees. Company reserves the  
right to change or remove assigned codes and/or  
numbers when such change is reasonably  
necessary in the conduct of its business.  
acknowledges that chargeable time for telephone  
calls and BOOST Walkie-Talkie call transmissions  
originated by a handset begins when a connection  
is established with Company facilities. A new  
BOOST Walkie-Talkie call is initiated by a call  
participant if that participant responds more than  
six (6) seconds after the other party finishes its  
BOOST MOBILETM CONNECT transmission.  
Customer accepts responsibility for Airtime  
charges from incoming telephone calls to the  
handset from the time that Customer responds to  
the call. Service charges may apply to some  
service options when Customer calls the BOOST  
MOBILETM Customer Service number  
1-888-BOOST-4U (1-888-266-7848). If Customer  
disputes any Service charges, Customer must  
submit a written explanation within forty five (45)  
days from the date Company debits Customer’s  
account for the disputed Service. If Company  
determines that an error was made with respect to  
any disputed Service charges, Company shall  
credit Customer’s account in the amount of the  
error. If Customer does not pay the amount in  
dispute owed to Company, Company may exercise  
any remedies it may have under this Agreement for  
non-payment of Service charges. Company  
reserves the right to modify any and all elements of  
the Service charges at any time by giving notice of  
such changes to Customer. If Customer continues  
to use the Service after the Company has provided  
Customer does not have any proprietary interest in  
such codes or numbers. Although Federal and  
state laws may make it illegal for third parties to  
listen in on service, complete privacy cannot be  
guaranteed. Company shall not be liable to  
Customer or to any third party for any  
eavesdropping on or interception of  
communications from Company’s System.  
6. RATES, CHARGES, AND PAYMENT – You will  
be charged for your use of the Service in  
accordance with the terms of the BOOST MOBILE  
Rate Plan, as found in your BOOST MOBILE  
handset kit or online at www.boostmobile.com.  
You may request a copy of this document from  
Boost Mobile at any time. Customer agrees to pay  
Company, on a prepay basis, for charges by  
Company for the Service. Customer  
200  
Boost MobileTM Terms and Conditions of Service  
such notice, Customer will be deemed to have  
accepted the changes, and such changes will be  
effective immediately upon Customer’s use of the  
Service following notice of the changes, unless the  
Company’s communication indicates a later  
effective date. If Customer does not accept the  
changes, Customer must immediately cease all  
use of the Service.  
wireless Internet compatible phone, and is subject  
to any storage, memory or other Equipment  
limitation. Only certain Internet sites may be  
accessed, and certain BOOST MOBILE Wireless  
Web Services may not be available in all Company  
Service areas.  
8. APPLICATION CUSTOMER CARE AND  
SUPPORT – Customer acknowledges and agrees  
that in most cases, the developer of an Application  
is responsible for providing customer care and  
Application support to all Customers using the  
Application. In the event Customer contacts  
Company customer care with a problem  
concerning the use of an Application, Customer  
may be referred to the Application developer’s  
customer care, and Company shall have no  
obligation to support such Application.  
7. BOOST MOBILE WIRELESS WEB SERVICES  
– BOOST MOBILE Wireless Web Services,  
consisting of certain applications such as Internet,  
email, data and other wireless information services  
(the “Applications”) are part of the Services that  
can be obtained through Company. Certain  
Applications offered through Company or  
authorized third parties may be compatible with the  
Equipment and/or the Service offered by  
Company. Customer acknowledges and agrees  
that there is no guarantee or assurance that the  
Applications are compatible, or will continue to be  
compatible, with Company’s System or any of its  
Equipment or Service offerings. Such compatibility  
shall not be construed as an endorsement of a  
particular Application or a commitment on the part  
of Company that Application(s) will continue to be  
compatible with the System, Equipment or Service  
for any period of time. Company reserves the right,  
in its sole discretion, to disable or discontinue any  
Application for any reason. Use of BOOST  
9. CONTENT; INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY  
RIGHTS – Company is not a publisher of the third  
party content that Customer may access from time  
to time through BOOST MOBILE Wireless Web  
Services; therefore, Company is not responsible  
for the content provided by such third parties,  
including but not limited to statements, opinions,  
graphics, photos, music, services and other  
information (“Content”), and accessed by  
Customer through Boost Mobile Wireless Web  
Services. Company gives no guarantee or  
assurance as to the currency, accuracy,  
MOBILE Wireless Web Services requires a  
201  
completeness or utility of Content obtained through  
BOOST MOBILE Wireless Web Services.  
Company, Content providers and others have  
proprietary interests in certain Content. Customer  
shall not reproduce, broadcast, distribute, sell,  
publish, commercially exploit or otherwise  
disseminate such Content in any manner, or permit  
others to do so, without the prior written consent of  
Company, Content providers, or others with  
proprietary interests in such Content, as  
applicable.  
excise taxes; sales and transaction taxes; utility  
taxes; regulatory fees and assessments; universal  
service assessments, telephone relay service  
(TRS) assessments; recoveries or similar charges.  
Customer shall be responsible for such Charges  
regardless of whether the Charge is imposed upon  
the sale of equipment or services, upon Customer,  
or upon Company. If any such Charge is  
determined to be applicable and has not been paid  
by Customer before Customer accepts delivery of  
equipment, Customer shall pay Company the full  
amount of any such Charge no later than ten (10)  
days after receipt of the invoice therefor.  
10. RISK OF LOSS: INSURANCE – Upon  
Customer’s acceptance of delivery of the  
Equipment, all risk of loss, damage, theft, or  
destruction to the Equipment shall be borne by the  
Customer. No such loss, damage, theft, or  
destruction of the Equipment, in whole or part, shall  
impair the obligations of Customer hereunder,  
including, without limitation, responsibility for the  
payment of Service Charges due hereunder.  
12. COVERAGE AREA – Local Dispatch (BOOST  
Walkie-Talkie), cellular calling, BOOST MOBILE  
Wireless Web Services, and respective coverage  
areas for these Services are subject to change at  
any time at the sole discretion of Company.  
13. DEFAULT / TERMINATION - If you breach  
any representation to Company or fail to perform  
any of the promises you made in this Agreement,  
you will be in default and Company may, without  
notice to you, suspend Service and/or terminate  
this Agreement, in addition to all other remedies  
available to us. You agree to pay all costs  
including reasonable attorneys fees, collection  
fees, and court costs Company may incur in  
enforcing this Agreement through any appeals.  
11. TAXES, FEES, SURCHARGES &  
ASSESSMENTS – Customer is responsible for all  
federal, state, and local taxes, fees, surcharges,  
and other assessments (collectively, “Charges”)  
that are imposed on telecommunications services,  
other services, and equipment or that are  
measured by gross receipts from the sale of  
telecommunications services and/or equipment.  
Such Charges shall include, but are not limited to:  
202  
Boost MobileTM Terms and Conditions of Service  
14. LIMITATION AND CONDITION OF LIABILITY;  
INDEMNITY - Company does not assume and  
shall have no liability for (i) failure to deliver the  
Equipment within a specified time period; (ii)  
unavailability or delays in delivery of the Equipment  
or the Services; (iii) damage due directly or  
indirectly to causes beyond the control of  
disruption. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE SET  
FORTH IN THE PRECEDING SENTENCE, IN NO  
EVENT WILL THE COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR  
ACTUAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL OR OTHER INDIRECT DAMAGES  
ARISING OUT OF THE SERVICES, WHETHER  
CAUSED BY ITS NEGLIGENCE OR  
Company, including, but not limited to acts of God,  
acts of the public enemy, acts of the government,  
acts or failure to act of the Customer, its agents,  
employees or subcontractors, fires, floods,  
epidemics, quarantine restrictions, corrosive  
substances in the air or other hazardous  
OTHERWISE, NOR FOR ECONOMIC LOSS,  
PERSONAL INJURIES OR PROPERTY  
DAMAGES SUSTAINED BY THE CUSTOMER  
OR ANY THIRD PARTIES ARISING OUT OF THE  
SERVICES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES  
WILL NEXTEL, IN CONJUNCTION WITH WHICH  
THE COMPANY PROVIDES THE SERVICES, BE  
LIABLE TO CUSTOMER FOR ANY DAMAGES,  
OF ANY KIND WHATSOVER, REGARDLESS OF  
THE FORM OF ACTION OR CAUSE OF ACTION,  
ARISING OUT OF THE SERVICES. CUSTOMER  
IRREVOCABLY WAIVES ANY CLAIM YOU  
MIGHT OTHERWISE HAVE AGAINST NEXTEL  
ARISING OUT OF THE SERVICES AND  
COVENANTS NOT TO MAKE OR BRING ANY  
CLAIM OF ANY KIND AGAINST NEXTEL  
ARISING OUT OF THE SERVICES. Customer  
agrees to indemnify, defend, and hold Company  
and Nextel harmless from any Customer violations  
of FCC rules and regulations or Customer violation  
environmental conditions, strikes, freight  
embargoes, inability to obtain materials or  
services, commotion, war, unusually severe  
weather conditions or default of Company’s  
subcontractors whether or not due to any such  
causes; or (iv) the use of BOOST MOBILE  
Wireless Web Services, including but not limited to  
the accuracy or utility of any information acquired  
from the Internet through BOOST MOBILE  
Wireless Web Services; or Internet Services,  
Content or Applications whether or not supported  
by Company. Without limiting the foregoing, the  
Company’s sole liability for Service disruption,  
whether caused by the negligence of the Company  
or otherwise, is limited to a credit allowance not  
exceeding an amount equal to the proportionate  
charge to the Customer for the period of Service  
203  
of any statutes, ordinances or laws of any local,  
state, or federal public authority. The terms of this  
Section 14 will survive any termination or  
expiration of this Agreement  
American Arbitration Association (“AAA”), as  
modified by this Agreement. You and we agree  
that this Agreement evidences a transaction in  
interstate commerce and the arbitration will be  
interpreted and enforced in accordance with the  
WIA Rules and the laws of the Commonwealth  
of Virginia. The arbitration will be conducted at a  
location in Reston, Virginia, to be designated by  
the Company.  
15. RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES -. PLEASE  
READ THIS SECTION CAREFULLY. IT  
AFFECTS RIGHTS THAT YOU MAY  
OTHERWISE HAVE. IT PROVIDES FOR  
RESOLUTION OF MOST DISPUTES THROUGH  
ARBITRATION INSTEAD OF COURT TRIALS  
AND CLASS ACTIONS. ARBITRATION IS FINAL  
AND BINDING AND SUBJECT TO ONLY VERY  
LIMITED REVIEW BY A COURT. THIS  
ARBITRATION CLAUSE SHALL SURVIVE  
TERMINATION OR EXPIRATION OF THIS  
AGREEMENT.  
B. COST OF ARBITRATION. All administrative  
fees and expenses of an Arbitration will be  
divided equally between you and Company. In  
all arbitrations, each party will bear the expense  
of its own counsel, experts, witnesses and  
preparation and presentation of evidence at the  
arbitration.  
A. ARBITRATION PROCEDURES. YOU  
MUST FIRST PRESENT ANY CLAIM OR  
DISPUTE TO US BY CONTACTING BOOST  
MOBILE CUSTOMER CARE, IN WRITING, TO  
ALLOW US THE OPPURTUNITY TO  
RESOLVE THE DISPUTE. You may invoke  
arbitration if your claim or dispute is not resolved  
within 60 days after we receive your detailed  
written description of the dispute or claim and  
the circumstances giving rise to it. The  
C. WAIVER OF PUNITIVE DAMAGE CLAIMS  
AND CLASS ACTION. By this Agreement, both  
Customer and Company are waiving certain  
rights to litigate disputes in court. If for any  
reason the arbitration clause is deemed  
inapplicable or invalid, Customer and Company  
both waive, to the fullest extent allowed by law,  
any right we might otherwise have to recover  
punitive or exemplary damages and any right to  
pursue any claims on a class or consolidated  
basis or in a representative capacity.  
arbitration of any dispute or claim shall be  
conducted in accordance with the Wireless  
Industry Arbitration rules (“WIA Rules”) of the  
204  
Boost MobileTM Terms and Conditions of Service  
16. COMPLETE  
Agreement, or resell the services that are subject  
to this Agreement without prior written consent of  
Company. Subject to the restrictions contained  
herein, this Agreement shall bind and inure to the  
benefit of the successors and permitted assigns of  
the parties hereto. The laws of the Commonwealth  
of Virginia, without application of its conflicts of  
laws principles, shall govern this Agreement.  
AGREEMENT/SEVERABILITY/WAIVER – This  
Agreement sets forth all of the agreements  
between the parties concerning the Services and  
purchase of the Equipment, and there are no oral  
or written agreements between them other than as  
set forth in this Agreement. No amendment or  
addition to this Agreement shall be binding upon  
this Company unless it is in writing and signed by  
both parties (and, in the case of the Company, by  
an officer of the Company). Should any provision  
of this Agreement be found illegal or in  
18. NOTICE REGARDING USE OF SERVICE  
FOR 911 OR OTHER EMERGENCY CALLS – The  
Service provided hereunder does not interact with  
911 and other emergency services in the same  
manner as landline telephone service. Depending  
on the circumstances of a particular call, the  
Service provided hereunder may not be able to  
identify your location to emergency services and  
you may not always be connected to the  
appropriate emergency services provider.  
Additionally, the provision of 911 or other  
emergency services may be conditioned on  
payment of amounts to the governmental  
authorities who implement or coordinate access to  
such services, and Customer agrees that  
Company may apportion and pass through such  
amounts to Customer, which shall be paid by  
Customer when due, in connection with  
contravention of the law, such provision shall be  
considered null and void but the remainder of this  
Agreement shall not be affected thereby. The  
failure of Company, at any time to require the  
performance by Customer of the provisions of this  
Agreement shall not affect in any way the right to  
require such performances at any later time, nor  
shall the waiver by Company of a breach of any  
provision hereof be taken or held to be a waiver of  
compliance with or breach of any other provision or  
a continuing waiver of such provision.  
17. ASSIGNMENT/RESALE/GOVERNING LAW –  
This Agreement may be freely assigned by  
Company to any successor of it or any other firm or  
entity capable of performing its obligations  
hereunder, and upon any such assignment,  
Company shall be released from all obligations to  
Customer. Customer may not assign this  
Customer’s access to such 911 or other  
emergency services, where available.  
CUSTOMER AGREES TO HOLD COMPANY AND  
NEXTEL HARMLESS AGAINST ANY AND ALL  
205  
CLAIMS, DEMANDS, ACTIONS, OR CAUSES OF  
ACTION (INCLUDING ALL ACTIONS BY THIRD  
PARTIES) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR  
ATTEMPTED USE OF THE COMPANY’S  
SERVICE TO ACCESS 911 OR OTHER  
EMERGENCY SERVICES.  
FOREGOING, NEITHER COMPANY NOR  
NEXTEL MAKES ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR  
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
CUSTOMER HEREBY WAIVES, AS AGAINST  
COMPANY AND NEXTEL ALL OTHER  
WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, CONDITIONS,  
OR LIABILITIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
ARISING BY LAW OR OTHERWISE. IN NO  
EVENT SHALL COMPANY, OR NEXTEL BE  
LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, OR  
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, WHETHER OR NOT  
OCCASIONED BY THEIR NEGLIGENCE AND  
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LIABILITY  
FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE RESULTING  
FROM THE INTERRUPTION OR FAILURE IN  
THE OPERATION OF ANY EQUIPMENT SOLD  
OR OTHERWISE PROVIDED HEREUNDER.  
THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND  
BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION CONTAINED  
HEREIN. CUSTOMER ASSUMES THE ENTIRE  
RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND  
19. NO WARRANTY (SERVICE) – NEITHER  
COMPANY NOR NEXTEL MAKES ANY  
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY  
IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY  
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  
TO CUSTOMER IN CONNECTION WITH ITS USE  
OF THE SERVICE. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
COMPANY OR NEXTEL BE LIABLE FOR  
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER  
INDIRECT DAMAGES TO THE FULL EXTENT  
THE SAME MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.  
CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT SERVICE  
INTERRUPTIONS WILL OCCUR FROM TIME TO  
TIME, AND AGREES TO HOLD COMPANY AND  
NEXTEL HARMLESS FOR ALL SUCH  
PERFORMANCE OF THE EQUIPMENT.  
INTERRUPTIONS.  
UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED BY COMPANY,  
IF THE EQUIPMENT PROVES DEFECTIVE, THE  
COSTS OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING AND  
REPAIR WILL BE BORNE BY CUSTOMER.  
20. NO WARRANTY (EQUIPMENT) – NEITHER  
COMPANY NOR NEXTEL MAKES ANY  
WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS OF ANY  
KIND, STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO  
CUSTOMER OR TO ANY OTHER PURCHASER  
OF THIS EQUIPMENT. WITHOUT LIMITING THE  
206  
Boost MobileTM Terms and Conditions of Service  
21. DEFINITIONS – For purposes of this  
Agreement: 1) “Call Credit Validity Period” means  
the number of days, from the date of call credit  
activation until the date of call credit expiration, set  
out in the relevant rate plan; 2) “RE-BOOST Card”  
means the Boost Mobile card containing additional  
call credits which may be purchased from  
participating outlets or the voucher number and  
expiration date provided to customers when  
additional call credits are purchased without a card  
being provided, as applicable; 3) “Grace Period”  
means the 60 day period commencing on the date  
of Call Credit expiration, and ending on the date of  
account cancellation.  
207  
•
•
United States Federal Communications  
Commission, Code of Federal Regulations; 47  
CFR part 2 sub-part J.  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) /  
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE). C95. 1-1992.  
Safety and General  
Information  
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND  
EFFICIENT OPERATION.  
READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING  
YOUR INTEGRATED MULTI-SERVICE  
PORTABLE RADIO.  
•
•
•
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE). C95. 1-1999 Edition.  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing  
Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998.  
Ministry of Health (Canada). Safety Code 6.  
Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency  
Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range  
from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999.  
Australian Communications Authority  
Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic  
Radiation - Human Exposure) Standard 2003.  
ANATEL, Brasil Regulatory Authority, Resolution  
303 (July 2, 2002) "Regulation of the limitation of  
exposure to electrical, magnetic, and  
electromagnetic fields in the radio frequency  
range between 9 kHz and 300 GHz."  
"Attachment to Resolution 303 from July 2,  
2002."  
RF Operational  
Characteristics  
Your radio product contains a radio frequency  
transmitter to convey the information you wish to  
send as well as occasional automatic signals used  
to sustain connection to the wireless network, and  
a receiver which enables you to receive  
communication and connection information from  
the network.  
•
•
Portable Radio Product  
Operation and EME Exposure  
Your Motorola radio product is designed to comply  
with the following national and international  
standards and guidelines regarding exposure of  
human beings to radio frequency electromagnetic  
energy (EME):  
208  
         
Safety and General Information  
To assure optimal radio product performance  
and make sure human exposure to radio  
frequency electromagnetic energy is within the  
guidelines set forth in the above standards,  
always adhere to the following procedures:  
When using your radio product as a  
traditional two-way radio, hold the  
radio product in a vertical position  
with the microphone one to two  
inches (2.5 to 5 cm) away from the  
lips.  
Phone Operation  
When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your  
radio product as you would a wireline telephone.  
Speak directly into the microphone.  
Body-worn operation  
To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure  
guidelines, if you wear a radio product on your  
body when transmitting, always place the radio  
product in a Motorola approved clip, holder,  
holster, case or body harness for this product.  
Use of non-Motorola-approved accessories may  
exceed FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do  
not use a Motorola approved body-worn  
accessory and are not using the radio product  
in the intended use positions along side the  
head in the phone mode or in front of the face  
in the two-way radio mode, then ensure the  
antenna and the radio product are kept the  
following minimum distances from the body  
when transmitting  
Two-way radio operation  
Your radio product has been designed and tested  
to comply with national and international standards  
and guidelines regarding human exposure to RF  
electromagnetic energy, when operated in the  
two-way mode (at the face, or at the abdomen  
when using an audio accessory) at usage factors  
of up to 50% talk/50% listen.  
Transmit no more than the rated duty factor of 50%  
of the time. To transmit (talk), push the  
Push-To-Talk (PTT) button. To receive calls,  
release the PTT button. Transmitting 50% of the  
time or less, is important because this radio  
generates measurable RF energy only when  
transmitting (in terms of measuring for standards  
compliance).  
•
Phone or Two-way radio mode: one inch (2.5  
cm)  
•
Data operation using any data feature with or  
without an accessory cable: one inch (2.5  
cm)  
209  
Portable Radio Product Operation and EME Exposure  
ALL MODELS WITH FCC ID AZ489FT5846 MEET THE  
GOVERNMENT’S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE  
TO RADIO WAVES.  
SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the  
ear is 0.59 W/kg and when tested on the body, as  
described in this user guide, is 1.32 W/kg during packet  
data transmission. (Body-worn measurements differ  
among phone models, depending upon available  
accessories and FCC requirements.)2  
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It  
is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission  
limits for exposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy set by  
the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.  
Government. These limits are part of comprehensive  
guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for  
the general population. The guidelines are based on  
standards that were developed by independent scientific  
organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of  
scientific studies. The standards include a substantial  
safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons,  
regardless of age and health.  
While there may be differences between the SAR levels of  
various phones and at various positions, they all meet the  
government requirement for safe exposure.  
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this  
model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in  
compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR  
information on this model phone is on file with the FCC  
and can be found under the Display Grant section of  
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID  
AZ489FT5846.  
The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones  
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific  
Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is  
Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR)  
can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications Industry  
Association (CTIA) web-site at http://www.wow-com.com.  
1
1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard  
operating positions reviewed by the FCC with the phone  
transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested  
frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the  
highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the  
phone while operating can be well below the maximum  
value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at  
multiple power levels so as to use only the power required  
to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a  
wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output.  
1 In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for  
mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg)  
averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard  
incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give  
additional protection for the public and to account for any  
variations in measurements.  
2
The SAR information reported to the FCC includes the  
Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it  
must be tested and certified to the FCC that is does not  
exceed the limit established by the government-adopted  
requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in  
positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the  
body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest  
FCC-accepted Motorola testing protocol, assessment  
procedure, and measurement uncertainty range for this  
product.  
210  
Safety and General Information  
Antenna Care  
Facilities  
Use only the supplied or an approved  
To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or  
compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio product in  
any facility where posted notices instruct you to do  
so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using  
equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy.  
replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas,  
modifications, or attachments could damage the  
radio product and may violate FCC regulations.  
DO NOT hold the antenna when the radio  
product is “IN USE”. Holding the antenna affects  
call quality and may cause the radio product to  
operate at a higher power level than needed.  
Aircraft  
When instructed to do so, turn off your radio  
product when on board an aircraft. Any use of a  
radio product must be in accordance with  
Approved Accessories  
For a list of approved Motorola accessories call  
1-800-453-0920, or visit our website at  
www.motorola.com/iden.  
applicable regulations per airline crew instructions.  
Medical Devices  
Pacemakers  
Electro Magnetic  
The Advanced Medical Technology Association  
(AdvaMed) recommends that a minimum  
separation of 6 inches (15 cm) be maintained  
between a handheld wireless radio product and a  
pacemaker. These recommendations are  
consistent with those of the U.S. Food and Drug  
Administration.  
Interference/Compatibility  
Note: Nearly every electronic device is  
susceptible to electromagnetic  
interference (EMI) if inadequately  
shielded, designed or otherwise  
configured for electromagnetic  
compatibility.  
Persons with pacemakers should:  
•
ALWAYS keep the radio product more than 6  
inches (15 cm) from their pacemaker when the  
radio product is turned ON.  
211  
       
Operational Warnings  
•
•
Not carry the radio product in a breast pocket.  
Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize  
the potential for interference.  
Turn the radio product OFF immediately if you  
have any reason to suspect that interference is  
taking place.  
•
•
•
Give full attention to driving and to the road.  
Use hands-free operation, if available.  
Pull off the road and park before making or  
answering a call if driving conditions so require.  
•
Operational Warnings  
For Vehicles with an Air  
Bag  
Do not place a portable radio product in the area  
over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area.  
Air bags inflate with great force. If a portable radio  
is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air  
bag inflates, the radio product may be propelled  
with great force and cause serious injury to  
occupants of the vehicle.  
!
Hearing Aids  
Some digital wireless radio products may interfere  
with some hearing aids. In the event of such  
interference, you may want to consult your hearing  
aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. For more  
Hearing Aid Compatibility information, see  
“Hearing Aid Compatibility” on page 216.  
Other Medical Devices  
If you use any other personal medical device,  
consult the manufacturer of your device to  
determine if it is adequately shielded from RF  
energy. Your physician may be able to assist you  
in obtaining this information.  
Potentially Explosive Atmospheres  
Turn off your radio product prior to entering any  
area with a potentially explosive atmosphere,  
unless it is a radio product type especially qualified  
for use in such areas as “Intrinsically Safe” (for  
example, Factory Mutual, CSA, or UL approved).  
Do not remove, install, or charge batteries in such  
areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive  
Use While Driving  
Check the laws and regulations on the use of radio  
products in the area where you drive. Always obey  
them.  
atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire  
resulting in bodily injury or even death.  
When using the radio product while driving, please:  
212  
 
Safety and General Information  
Note: The areas with potentially explosive  
atmospheres referred to above include  
fueling areas such as below decks on  
boats, fuel or chemical transfer or  
storage facilities, areas where the air  
contains chemicals or particles, such  
as grain, dust or metal powders, and  
any other area where you would  
normally be advised to turn off your  
vehicle engine. Areas with potentially  
explosive atmospheres are often but  
not always posted.  
Operational Cautions  
Batteries  
!
All batteries can cause property damage and/or  
bodily injury, such as burns if a conductive material  
such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touches  
exposed terminals. The conductive material may  
complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and  
become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any  
charged battery, particularly when placing it inside  
a pocket, purse, or other container with metal  
objects. To reduce the risk of injury, batteries  
should not be exposed to fire, disassembled, or  
crushed.  
Blasting Caps and Areas  
To avoid possible interference with blasting  
operations, turn off your radio product when you  
are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area,  
or in areas posted: “Turn off two-way radio”. Obey  
all signs and instructions.  
Cleaning and Drying Considerations  
Using a leather carry case may help protect the  
surfaces and help prevent liquids (e.g., rain) from  
entering into the interior of the radio product. This  
product is not water proof, and exposing the unit to  
liquids may result in permanent damage to the unit.  
For Phones With Music Players  
Listening to music at high volumes over extended  
periods of time may be harmful to a user's hearing.  
User should take precautions to minimize this risk  
by moderating volume levels. If you experience  
ringing or other hearing-related discomfort, lower  
volume or discontinue use.  
If your radio product interior gets wet, then do not  
try to accelerate drying with the use of an oven or a  
dryer as this will damage the radio product and  
void the warranty. Instead, do the following:  
1 Immediately power off the radio product.  
213  
   
Accessory Safety Information  
2 Remove Battery and SIM card (if so equipped)  
•
•
Before using any battery or battery charger, read  
all the instructions for and cautionary markings  
on (1) the battery, (2) the battery charger, which  
may include a separate wall-mounted power  
supply or transformer, and (3) the radio product  
using the battery.  
Do not expose any battery charger to water,  
rain, or snow as they are designed for indoor or  
in-vehicle use only.  
from radio product.  
3 Shake excess liquid from radio product.  
4 Place the radio product and battery in an area  
that is at room temperature and has good air  
flow.  
5 Let the radio product, battery, and SIM card dry  
for 72 hours before reconnecting the battery  
and/or powering on the radio product.  
If the radio product does not work after following  
the steps listed above, contact your dealer for  
servicing information.  
Warning: To reduce the risk of injury,  
charge only the rechargeable batteries  
described in “Charging the Battery” on  
page 4. Other types of batteries may  
burst, causing personal injury and  
damage.  
!
Clean the external surfaces of the radio product  
with a damp cloth, using a mild solution of  
dishwashing detergent and water. Some  
household cleaners may contain chemicals that  
could seriously damage the radio product. Avoid  
the use of any petroleum-based solvent cleaners.  
Also, avoid applying liquids directly on the radio  
product.  
•
To reduce the risk of damage to the cord or plug,  
pull by the plug rather than the cord when you  
disconnect the battery charger from the power  
source outlet.  
•
•
Do not operate any battery charger with a  
damaged cord or plug — replace them  
immediately.  
Battery chargers may become warm during  
operation, but not hot. If it becomes hot to the  
touch, unplug it from the power outlet  
immediately and discontinue its use.  
Accessory Safety Information  
Important: Save these accessory safety  
instructions.  
214  
   
Safety and General Information  
•
•
•
Use of a non-recommended attachment to a  
battery charger may result in a risk of fire,  
electric shock, or injury to persons.  
Make sure the battery charger power cord is  
located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped  
over, or subjected to damage or stress.  
An extension cord should not be used with any  
battery charger unless absolutely necessary.  
Use of an improper extension cord could result  
in a risk of fire and electric shock. If an extension  
cord must be used, make sure that:  
•
•
•
•
Maximum ambient temperature around the  
power supply or transformer of any battery  
charger should not exceed 40°C (104°F).  
The output power from the power supply or  
transformer must not exceed the rating given on  
the Desktop Dual-Pocket Charger.  
The disconnection from the line voltage is made  
by unplugging the power supply from the AC  
receptacle.  
To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug any  
battery charger from the outlet before attempting  
any maintenance or cleaning.  
•
The pins on the plug of the extension cord are  
the same number, size, and shape as those  
on the plug of the charger.  
For optimum charging performance, turn off the  
radio product while charging it in any battery  
charger.  
•
•
The extension cord is properly wired and in  
good electrical condition.  
The cord size is 18AWG for lengths up to 100  
feet and 16AWG for lengths up to 150 feet.  
•
•
Do not operate any battery charger if it has  
received a sharp blow, has been dropped, or  
has been damaged in any way; take it to a  
qualified service technician.  
Do not disassemble a battery charger; take it to  
a qualified service technician when service or  
repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may  
result in a risk of electric shock or fire.  
215  
“M” Rating: Mobile phones rated M3 or M4 meet FCC  
requirements for hearing aid compatibility and are  
likely to generate less interference to hearing devices  
than phones that are not labeled. (M4 is the “better” or  
higher of the two ratings.)  
Hearing Aid  
Compatibility  
When some mobile phones are used with certain  
hearing devices (including hearing aids andcochlear  
implants), users may detect a noise which can  
interfere with the effectiveness of the hearing device.  
Some hearing devices are more “immune” than others  
to this interference noise, and mobile phones can also  
vary in the amount of interference noise they may  
generate at any given time. ANSI standard C63.19  
was developed to provide a standardized means of  
measuring both mobile phone and hearing devices to  
determine usability rating categories for both.  
"T" Rating: Mobile phones rated T3 or T4 meet FCC  
requirements for compatibility with telecoil-type ("T  
Switch" or "Telephone Switch") hearing devices and  
are likely to be more usable with such hearing devices  
than unrated phones. (T4 is the "better" or higher of  
the two ratings.)  
Hearing devices may also be measured for immunity  
to interference noise from mobile phones. In some  
cases, hearing devices can be modified or “hardened”  
to improve operation with a mobile phone. Your  
hearing device manufacturer or hearing health  
professional may help you improve the interaction of  
your mobile phone and hearing device. Not all hearing  
devices are rated for compatibility with mobile phones,  
but hearing devices that are rated should have the  
rating available. Be sure to evaluate your personal  
needs by trying out this mobile phone with your  
specific hearing device, using both antenna positions if  
this mobile phone is equipped with a retractable  
antenna.  
Ratings have been developed for mobile phones to  
assist hearing device users find phones that may be  
compatible with their particular hearing device. Not all  
mobile phones are rated for compatibility with hearing  
devices, but mobile phones that are rated should have  
the rating available. This rating may depend on the  
position of a retractable antenna.  
Results will vary depending on the user’s hearing  
device and individual type and degree of hearing loss.  
If a hearing device is particularly vulnerable to  
interference noise, even a mobile phone with a higher  
rating may still cause unacceptable noise levels in the  
hearing device. Evaluate your personal needs by  
trying out the mobile phone with your hearing device.  
More information about hearing aid compatibility may  
be found at:  
http://commerce.motorola.com/consumer/QWhtml/acc  
essibility/default.html (www.motorola.com),  
www.fcc.gov, www.fda.gov, and  
www.accesswireless.org.  
216  
     
Hearing Aid Compatibility  
217  
Disposal of your Mobile Telephone and Accessories  
more details. If no suitable scheme exists, you  
may return unwanted mobile telephones and  
electrical accessories to any Motorola Approved  
Service Centre in your region.  
Caring for the  
Environment  
by Recycling  
This symbol on a Motorola product means the  
product should not be disposed of with household  
waste.  
Disposal of your Mobile  
Telephone and Accessories  
Please do not dispose of mobile telephones or  
electrical accessories, such as chargers or  
headsets, with your household waste. In some  
countries or regions, collection systems have been  
set up to handle waste electrical and electronic  
items. Please contact your regional authorities for  
218  
   
MOTOROLA LIMITED  
WARRANTY  
PRODUCTS  
COVERED  
LENGTH OF  
COVERAGE  
Note: FOR IDEN SUBSCRIBER PRODUCTS,  
ACCESSORIES AND SOFTWARE  
PURCHASED IN THE UNITED STATES  
OR CANADA  
Products as defined  
above.  
One (1) year from the  
date of purchase by the  
first consumer  
purchaser of the  
product.  
What Does this Warranty Cover?  
Subject to the exclusions contained below,  
Motorola, Inc. warrants its Motorola iDEN Digital  
Mobile and Portable Handsets ("Products"),  
Motorola-branded or certified accessories sold for  
use with these Products ("Accessories") and  
Motorola software contained on CD-Roms or other  
tangible media and sold for use with these  
Products ("Software") to be free from defects in  
materials and workmanship under normal  
consumer usage for the period(s) outlined below.  
This limited warranty is a consumer's exclusive  
remedy, and applies as follows to new  
Products, Accessories and Software  
Accessories as  
defined above.  
One (1) year from the  
date of purchase by the  
first consumer  
purchaser of the  
product.  
Products or  
The balance of the  
Accessories that are original warranty or  
Repaired or Replaced. for ninety (90) days  
from the date returned  
to the consumer,  
whichever is longer.  
Software as defined  
Ninety (90) days from  
purchased by consumers in the United States  
or Canada, which are accompanied by this  
written warranty:  
above. Applies only to the date of purchase.  
physical defects in the  
media that embodies  
the copy of the software  
(e.g. CD-ROM, or  
floppy disk).  
219  
 
What is not covered? (Exclusions)  
Use of Non-Motorola Products and  
Accessories. Defects or damage that result from  
the use of Non-Motorola branded or certified  
Products, Accessories, Software or other  
peripheral equipment are excluded from coverage.  
Normal Wear and Tear. Periodic maintenance,  
repair and replacement of parts due to normal wear  
and tear are excluded from coverage.  
Ornamental Decorations. Ornamental  
decorations such as emblems, graphics,  
rhinestones, jewels, gemstones and their settings,  
and other decorative elements, are excluded from  
coverage.  
Unauthorized Service or Modification. Defects  
or damages resulting from service, testing,  
adjustment, installation, maintenance, alteration,  
including without limitation, software changes, or  
modification in any way by someone other than  
Motorola, or its authorized service centers, are  
excluded from coverage.  
Batteries. Only batteries whose fully charged  
capacity falls below 80% of their rated capacity and  
batteries that leak are covered by this limited  
warranty.  
Altered Products. Products or Accessories with  
(a) serial numbers or date tags that have been  
removed, altered or obliterated; (b) broken seals or  
that show evidence of tampering; (c) mismatched  
board serial numbers; or (d) nonconforming or  
non-Motorola housings, antennas, or parts, are  
excluded from coverage.  
Abuse & Misuse. Defects or damage that result  
from: (a) improper operation, storage, misuse or  
abuse, accident or neglect, such as physical  
damage (cracks, scratches, etc.) to the surface of  
the product resulting from misuse; (b) contact with  
liquid, water, rain, extreme humidity or heavy  
perspiration, sand, dirt or the like, extreme heat, or  
food; (c) use of the Products or Accessories for  
commercial purposes or subjecting the Product or  
Accessory to abnormal usage or conditions; or (d)  
other acts which are not the fault of Motorola, are  
excluded from coverage.  
Communication Services. Defects, damages, or  
the failure of Products, Accessories or Software  
due to any communication service or signal you  
may subscribe to or use with the Products,  
Accessories or Software is excluded from  
coverage.  
220  
MOTOROLA LIMITED WARRANTY  
Software Embodied in Physical Media. No  
warranty is made that the software will meet your  
requirements or will work in combination with any  
hardware or software applications provided by third  
parties, that the operation of the software products  
will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all defects  
in the software products will be corrected.  
How to Obtain Warranty Service or Other  
Information? To obtain service or information,  
please call:  
Motorola iDEN Customer Services  
1-800-453-0920 or 954-723-4910  
TTY-877-483-2840  
Software NOT Embodied in Physical Media.  
Software that is not embodied in physical media  
(e.g. software that is downloaded from the  
Or visit us online at  
http://www.motorola.com/iden/support  
You will receive instructions on how to ship the  
Products, Accessories or Software, at your  
expense, to a Motorola Authorized Repair Center.  
To obtain service, you must include: (a) a copy of  
your receipt, bill of sale or other comparable proof  
of purchase; (b) a written description of the  
problem; (c) the name of your service provider, if  
applicable; (d) the name and location of the  
installation facility (if applicable) and, most  
importantly; (e) your address and telephone  
number.  
internet), is provided "as is" and without warranty.  
Who is covered? This warranty extends only to  
the first consumer purchaser, and is not  
transferable.  
What will Motorola Do? Motorola, at its option,  
will at no charge repair, replace or refund the  
purchase price of any Products, Accessories or  
Software that does not conform to this warranty.  
We may use functionally equivalent  
reconditioned/refurbished/pre-owned or new  
Products, Accessories or parts. No data, software  
or applications added to your Product, Accessory  
or Software, including but not limited to personal  
contacts, games and ringer tones, will be  
reinstalled. To avoid losing such data, software  
and applications please create a back up prior to  
requesting service.  
What Other Limitations Are There? ANY  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL BE LIMITED  
TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED  
WARRANTY, OTHERWISE THE REPAIR,  
REPLACEMENT, OR REFUND AS PROVIDED  
UNDER THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY IS  
221  
THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE  
Laws in the United States and other countries  
preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for  
copyrighted Motorola software such as the  
exclusive rights to reproduce and distribute copies  
of the Motorola software. Motorola software may  
only be copied into, used in, and redistributed with,  
the Products associated with such Motorola  
software. No other use, including without limitation  
disassembly of such Motorola software or exercise  
of the exclusive rights reserved for Motorola, is  
permitted.  
CONSUMER, AND IS PROVIDED IN LIEU OF  
ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OF  
IMPLIED. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE  
LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) FOR DAMAGES IN  
EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE  
PRODUCT, ACCESSORY OR SOFTWARE, OR  
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR  
LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS, LOSS OF  
BUSINESS, LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA,  
SOFTWARE OR APPLICATIONS OR OTHER  
FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN  
CONNECTION WITH THE ABILITY OR INABILITY  
TO USE THE PRODUCTS, ACCESSORIES OR  
SOFTWARE TO THE FULL EXTENT THESE  
DAMAGES MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.  
Some states and jurisdictions do not allow the  
limitation or exclusion of incidental or  
consequential damages, or limitation on the  
length of an implied warranty, so the above  
limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.  
This warranty gives you specific legal rights,  
and you may also have other rights that vary  
from state to state or from one jurisdiction to  
another.  
222  
All other product names or services mentioned in  
this manual are the property of their respective  
trademark owners.  
Patent and Trademark  
Information  
Software Copyright Notice  
© 2005 Boost Worldwide, Inc. All rights reserved.  
BOOST, BOOST and Logo, BOOST MOBILE,  
BOOST MOBILE and Logo, and the Logo are  
trademarks and/or service marks of Boost  
Worldwide, Inc.  
The Motorola products described in this manual  
may include copyrighted Motorola and third party  
software stored in semiconductor memories or  
other media. Laws in the United States and other  
countries preserve for Motorola and third party  
software providers certain exclusive rights for  
copyrighted software, such as the exclusive rights  
to distribute or reproduce the copyrighted software.  
Accordingly, any copyrighted software contained in  
the Motorola products may not be modified,  
reverse-engineered, distributed, or reproduced in  
any manner to the extent allowed by law.  
Furthermore, the purchase of the Motorola  
products shall not be deemed to grant either  
directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise,  
any license under the copyrights, patents, or patent  
applications of Motorola or any third party software  
provider, except for the normal, non-exclusive,  
royalty-free license to use that arises by operation  
of law in the sale of a product.  
©2005 Nextel Communications, Inc. NEXTEL®, the  
NEXTEL logo®, NEXTEL. Done.TM, PTTTM, DIRECT  
CONNECT® and NEXTEL WORLDWIDE® are  
service marks, trademarks, and/or registered  
trademarks owned by Nextel Communications, Inc.  
MOTOROLA, the Stylized M Logo and all other  
trademarks indicated as such herein are  
trademarks of Motorola, Inc. ® Reg. U.S. Pat. &  
Tm. Off. © 2005 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Microsoft and Microsoft Internet Explorer are  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
Easy Media CreatorTM is a trademark of Roxio, Inc.  
T9 is a trademark owned by Tegic  
Communications.  
T9® Text Input Patent and Trademark Information  
This product is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437,  
U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and other  
patents pending.  
223  
   
charging 4  
door 3  
inserting 4  
safety 213  
receiving items 150  
selecting a Find Me duration  
145  
sending Contacts 149  
sending Datebook events  
149  
sending pictures 150  
setting device details 148  
setting voice dialing 144  
setting your phone 144  
status icons 11  
storing received items 150  
transfers, canceling 150  
transmitters 181  
Index  
A
Accessories 18  
safety 214  
Airplane mode 6  
Antenna 17  
Attachments 99  
see also MMS messages,  
attachments  
Audio player 9  
deleting files 46  
equalizer 47  
Baud rate 185  
Bluetooth 143  
access settings 143  
access settings, editing 148  
accessing 145  
bonds 143, 146  
connections, making 145  
deleting received items 150  
device details 148  
device names, editing 148  
devices, deleting 149  
devices, disconnecting 148  
devices, discovering 146,  
148  
discoverable mode 145  
during an active call 147  
headset 192  
folders and lists 41  
playing 39  
playlists 43  
searching for songs 42  
visuals 47  
turning on or off 144  
viewing received items 150  
Boost Mobile  
411 76  
Customer Care 194  
voice mail 108  
Wireless Web service plan  
116  
Audio recordings 131  
playing 131  
B
icons 10  
PINs 146  
reassigning a device name  
144  
Backlight 181, 182  
Battery  
Boost Walkie-Talkie  
calls, making 20  
number 7  
care 5  
224  
 
Index  
numbers, dialing 21  
182  
accessing from media center  
134  
options 183  
status messages 195  
using One Touch 23  
Boost Walkie-Talkie 20  
emergency 24  
ending 22  
entering number 22  
from memo 67  
from MMS messages 101  
from recent calls 53  
from SMS messages 114  
international 70  
making 20  
on hold 70  
phone calls 20  
receiving 21  
redialing 23, 182  
remote Boost Walkie-Talkie  
button 192  
creating MMS messages 91  
picture options 119  
setting up 124  
C
storing pictures 118  
taking pictures 118  
video options 122  
Circuit data 73  
Call alerts 48  
deleting 49  
queue 48  
receiving 48  
responding 48, 49  
sending 48  
Clock 182  
Contact information  
receiving 51, 141  
sending 140  
sorting 49  
viewing 49  
Contacts 58  
Call filtering 189  
Call forwarding 68  
all calls 68  
missed calls 68  
off 68  
Call restrictions 75  
Call Timers 72  
Calls  
accessing 59  
addressing MMS messages  
92  
capacity 64  
Speed Dial 23  
TTY, see TTY calls  
Turbo Dial 23  
creating entries 59  
creating MMS messages 91  
deleting 63  
editing entries 61  
icons 58  
voice name 23  
Camera 118  
additional features 76  
answering automatically 182  
answering with any key 21,  
see also pictures  
accessing 118  
international numbers 64  
pictures 58, 59, 60, 62, 121,  
225  
130  
screen 8  
Drafts 86, 96  
E
ringtones 58, 59, 60  
searching 63  
showing all entries 63  
showing only Boost  
Walkie-Talkie Numbers 63  
SIM card 58  
storing from Memo 67  
storing from MMS messages  
102  
Easy Media Creator 33  
installing 33  
see also MMS messages,  
drafts  
icons 97  
starting 35  
support 38  
DRM  
Email 60, 73, 86, 102  
receiving 81  
sending 81  
Emergency calls 24  
End key 2  
count-based usage 160  
default location 129  
definition 160  
deleting items 85, 133, 155,  
162  
expired items 163  
gifting 161  
storing from recent calls 52  
type 58  
voice name 61  
F
Faxes  
managing items 161  
media center 47, 129  
renewing license 162  
ringtones 84  
sharing items 161  
status icons 129, 160  
Tell-A-Friend 161  
time-based usage 160  
receiving 73  
sending 73  
Flip action 20, 21, 71  
D
Datebook  
profiles 176  
Dialing codes  
G
telecommunications relay  
service 75  
GPS Enabled 164  
almanac data 169  
best results 168  
emergency calls 25, 166  
map software 171  
privacy options 170  
security 170  
Digital rights management, see  
DRM  
Display  
viewing license information  
162  
backlight 181, 182  
contrast 182  
options 8  
DTMF dialing 145, 183  
226  
Index  
viewing location 167  
GPS PIN 184  
GPS, see GPS Enabled  
calling 70  
storing 64  
Internet  
security 116  
pictures 129  
renaming 132  
viewing 126  
Memo 67  
H
calling from 67  
creating 67  
editing 67  
storing to Contacts 67  
viewing 67  
J
Handset, see phone  
Headset 192  
Java applications  
deleting 155  
Hearing Aid Compatibility 216  
memory 156  
I
K
Icons  
Memory  
Keypad 2  
locking 17, 184  
Bluetooth 10, 11  
Contacts 58  
drafts 97  
DRM 160  
Inbox 100  
Java applications 156  
media center 134  
MMS messages 106  
ringtones 84  
L
Language 182  
Lists, see menus  
voice records 153  
Memory card  
sent items 98  
status 11  
M
audio player 39  
Media center 126  
audio recordings 131  
creating MMS messages 92  
deleting 133  
text entry 55  
voice records 151  
Idle screen 8  
creating MMS messages 91  
Inbox 86, 100  
icons 100  
copying items 133  
folders and files 27  
inserting 28  
moving items 133  
removing 30, 185  
DRM items 47, 129  
forward locked 128  
locking 132  
setting storage preference  
29, 123, 134, 185  
International numbers 70  
memory 134  
227  
storing pictures from camera  
forwarding 97, 101  
going to website 102  
Inbox 100  
locking 101  
memory 106  
message center 100  
quick notes 93, 104  
receiving 98  
replying 100  
sending 86, 96, 97  
sent items 97  
viewing 136  
118  
N
Menu key 2, 9  
Menus 8  
Navigation key 2  
P
context-sensitive 2, 9  
main menu 9  
Packet data 73  
Password  
voice mail 109  
Passwords 184  
Patent information 223  
Pauses  
dialing 70  
storing 64  
Phone 1, 8  
Message center  
MMS messages 100  
Message notifications 78  
setting options 78  
Messages 78  
reading 81, 114  
receiving 78  
text and numeric 79  
Messages, text Text  
sending 79  
setting up 104  
slide shows 99, 103, 104  
storing to Contacts 102  
MP3 files 9, 12, 26, 29, 39, 47  
see also audio player  
creating from CDs 33, 35  
Multi-Media messages, see  
MMS  
flip action 20, 21, 71  
locking 184  
modem 73  
off 6  
on 6  
Web 80  
MMS messages 86  
attachments 99, 103  
calling from 101  
creating 86  
setting up 3  
Pictures 129  
accessing the camera 118  
Mute 24  
My Info 136  
deleting 98, 100, 105, 107  
drafts 96  
embedded objects 99  
editing 136  
receiving 50, 141  
sending 137, 140  
Contacts 58, 59, 60, 62, 121,  
130  
deleting from messages 103  
228  
Index  
inserting in messages 93,  
memory 84  
off 82  
setting 82  
setting in Contacts 83  
vibrate 82  
R
120, 123, 129, 131  
receiving 139  
Radio frequency 208  
Recent calls 50  
recent calls 52  
saving from messages 102  
sending 138  
addressing MMS messages  
92  
call alerts 50  
calling from 53  
contact information 51  
creating MMS messages 91  
deleting 52  
display time 185  
My Info 50  
pictures 52  
viewing assigned 83  
Roxio, see Easy Media Creator  
taking 118  
Profiles 186  
S
call filtering 189  
changing settings 186  
creating 188  
Datebook 176  
deleting 188  
Safety 208  
accessory 214  
battery 213  
electromagnetic interference  
211  
medical devices 211  
radio frequency 208  
Security 116, 184  
Send key 2  
editing 188  
storing to Contacts 52  
viewing 51  
switching 186  
temporary 187  
viewing 186  
Redialing 23, 182  
Ringer 179  
PUK code 14  
see also Ring tones  
off 179  
Sent items 86, 97  
Q
see also MMS messages,  
sent items  
icons 98  
Ringtones 82  
Quick notes 93, 104  
see also MMS messages  
deleting 85  
downloading 84  
DRM 84  
Service, activating 6  
Settings 181  
see also MMS messages,  
quick notes  
in Contacts 58, 59, 60  
resetting 185  
229  
WT (Boost Walkie-Talkie)  
Turbo Dial 23  
T
options 183  
T9 Text Input, see text entry  
TDD/TTY devices 75  
Telecommunications relay  
service 75  
V
Shortcuts  
Video 122, 131  
Videos  
creating 190  
deleting 191  
editing 191  
deleting from messages 103  
saving from messages 102  
Voice Mail  
changing password 109  
greetings 109  
message forwarding 113  
playing messages 108  
Voice mail 79  
Text and numeric messages  
see SMS messages  
Text display area 8  
Text entry 55  
using 190  
SIM card 13, 15  
Contacts 58  
inserting 15  
removing 16  
SIM PIN 13, 184  
changing 14  
requirement 13  
unblocking 14  
Slide shows  
see MMS messages, slide  
shows  
SMS messages 114  
calling from 114  
database 55, 56  
icons 55  
mode 55  
Word mode 55  
Text messages 80  
Trademark information 223  
Transmitters 12, 181  
power button 6  
turning on and off 181  
TTY calls 74  
receiving 79  
sending calls to 21, 79  
setting up 7, 108  
Voice name 23, 59  
creating 61  
Voice records 151  
creating 151  
baud rate 75  
making 74  
mode 74  
on 74  
deleting 153  
icons 151  
labelling 152  
locking 152  
Speakerphone 24  
Speed Dial 23, 59, 61  
Status messages 195  
TTY devices 75  
memory 153  
230  
Index  
playing 152  
viewing 151  
Volume, setting 179, 184  
W
Waits  
dialing 70  
storing 64  
Wallpaper 121, 131  
Web Messaging 80  
White Page listings 76  
Word mode 55  
Y
Yellow Page listings 77  
231  

NETGEAR ReadyNAS Pro Business User Manual
MTD 247 462B000 User Manual
LG Electronics LG Lifes Good Cell Phone GB125 User Manual
Kyocera K352 User Manual
Kenwood KDC XBT8013U User Manual
Kenwood CD 3280M User Manual
HTC Dash User Manual
G Technology G DRIVE mini 0G02568 User Manual
Grindmaster 7306 User Manual
ABB AKK15 User Manual